Quarterlytics / Industrials / Marine Shipping / Genco Shipping & Trading Limited

Genco Shipping & Trading Limited

gnk · NYSE Industrials
Claim this profile
Ticker gnk
Exchange NYSE
Sector Industrials
Industry Marine Shipping
Employees 1037
← All annual reports
FY2024 Annual Report · Genco Shipping & Trading Limited
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
GREENE KING LIMITED 
 
ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL 
STATEMENTS 
  
 
FOR THE 52 WEEKS ENDED 29 DECEMBER 2024 
 
REGISTERED NUMBER: 00024511 
 
 
 

 
COMPANY INFORMATION   
 
 
DIRECTORS: 
 
N Mackenzie 
J Fearn  
 
G Magnus  
A Hunter 
 
P Macnab 
D Dyson 
 
R Smothers 
L C G Ma 
 
 
 
COMPANY SECRETARY: 
Mrs L A Keswick 
 
 
 
 
REGISTERED NUMBER: 
00024511 
 
 
 
 
REGISTERED OFFICE: 
Westgate Brewery 
 
 
Bury St. Edmunds 
 
 
Suffolk 
 
 
IP33 1QT 
 
 
 
 
AUDITOR: 
Deloitte LLP 
 
 
1 New Street Square 
 
 
London 
 
 
EC4A 3HQ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

 
 
GREENE KING LIMITED 
 
CONTENTS
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Pages 
 
 
 
 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT 
2  
 
 
 
OVERVIEW AND PERFORMANCE SUMMARY  
2 
 
OUR BUSINESS MODEL 
4 
 
DIVISIONAL PERFORMANCE  
7 
 
FINANCIAL REVIEW 
11 
 
DIRECTORS DUTIES 
15 
 
PRINCIPAL RISKS AND UNCERTAINTIES 
18 
 
ENVIRONMENTAL SOCIAL AND GOVERNANCE 
26 
 
NON-FINANCIAL AND SUSTAINABILITY INFORMATION STATEMENT 
34 
 
 
 
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE 
44 
 
 
 
 
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT 
44 
 
DIRECTORS’ REPORT 
46 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
 
48 
 
 
 
INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT 
 
48 
 
GROUP INCOME STATEMENT 
51 
 
GROUP STATEMENT OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME 
52 
 
GROUP BALANCE SHEET 
53 
 
GROUP CASHFLOW STATEMENT 
55 
 
GROUP STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY 
56 
 
NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS 
57 
 
COMPANY BALANCE SHEET 
98 
 
COMPANY STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY 
99 
 
NOTES TO THE COMPANY ACCOUNTS 
100 
 
ALTERNATIVE PERFORMANCE MEASURES 
104 
 
 

2 
 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT 
  
 
Delivered revenue growth across all four Greene King divisions – Group revenues increased 3.2% in 2024 driven by record 
Christmas bookings and strong demand from events such as the 2024 Men’s Euros. Greene King has grown ahead of the market and 
achieved its best-ever online review ratings of 4.5 (out of 5) for the year.  
 
Robust underlying profit performance – The group delivered a 6.4% increase in adjusted operating profit to £198.0m (prior period: 
£186.1m) driven by tight control of costs to mitigate industry headwinds, with profitability as in prior years positively impacted by 
exceptional investment levels. The group’s reported numbers were negatively impacted by the uncertain outlook for the hospitality 
industry compounded by the government’s Autumn Budget, which contributed to non-cash goodwill and property accounting 
impairments of £208.5m, which resulted in a statutory operating loss of £16.4m and a statutory loss before tax of £147.1m (prior period: 
£45.2m profit). The group maintains a robust capital structure with a strong balance sheet.  
 
Creating a business that’s fit for the future – Against the challenging macroeconomic backdrop and following the delivery of four 
years of business and cultural transformation, including industry-leading levels of investment in the estate, Greene King is now sharply 
focused on delivery. Capex reduced in the year to £172.7m (prior period: £194.8m), reflecting the move to leverage prior years 
investments, but will remain higher in future periods than the historic run rate. The group also undertook a reorganisation including the 
introduction of a smaller Executive Board structure and a restructuring of central support functions, the benefits of which will be realised 
across future periods.  
 
Invested in and evolved assets and brands – Greene King announced plans for a new £40m custom-built brewery in Bury St 
Edmunds, in a long-term commitment to British brewing, with planning permission granted in January 2025 and expected to be operational 
in 2027. Throughout 2024, the rollout of Hickory’s BBQ smokehouse restaurants continued, and Pub Partners performed strongly, with 
franchised concepts Hive and Nest adding 14 and 10 sites respectively. The benefits of the multimillion-pound digital investment into 
booking systems, customer apps, website development and the Pub Network of the Future (WiFi) are coming to fruition, as reflected by 
a record Christmas bookings performance. 
 
Established a compelling place to visit and work, driving improved customer experiences – Completed delivery of the 
Customer Engagement transformation programme, providing a single customer view database and integrated marketing automation 
platform. The engagement survey showed Sustainable Engagement of 85% and Business Pride of 84%, with team turnover improving 
9ppts to 57%. Pubs are vital to communities across the UK, and Greene King supported over 18,000 apprenticeships since 2011, with an 
apprentice having worked in 97% of pubs. Two new prison training kitchens were opened in the year under the Releasing Potential 
programme which has a commitment to hire 400 prison leavers by the end of 2025. Raised £3.9m for Macmillan Cancer Support, our 
highest fundraising to date, and celebrated the incredible milestone of raising over £20m since 2012.  
 
Confident in the future of the British pub – Greene King will continue to focus on what is within its control, creating a sustainable, 
well-invested and technology-first business focussed on customers, that is well-placed to mitigate the ongoing macroeconomic challenges 
the sector continues to face, to drive gain in both market share and customer spend.  
 
 
 
 
Nick Mackenzie, Greene King Chief Executive Officer, said: 
 
“2024 was a year of transition for Greene King as we shifted our focus from business transformation to delivery and began leveraging our industry-
leading investment programme. Pleasingly, we delivered topline revenue growth and have grown ahead of the market. While our tight control of 
costs meant we also delivered an increase in adjusted operating profit, our statutory results were impacted by the outlook for the industry, which 
was compounded by decisions made in the government’s Budget which have dramatically increased our costs. 
 
“Whilst we maintain our focus on creating an agile business with a tight grip on what is within our control, the industry continues to face a layering 
of costs which is changing the fundamental economics of the pub. We would encourage the government to urgently introduce the promised business 
rates reform, reduce regulation and the cost of doing business to ensure that our critical sector is protected, and pubs remain at the heart of 
communities UK-wide. 
 
“I want to thank our team members and pub partners who have remained tenacious and dedicated amidst what continues to be a very challenging 
time for our industry. As we move into a new phase, leveraging the investment of recent years, we will continue to invest with a focus on our people, 
being customer-first and brand-led and on further enhancing the digital experience. We remain confident in our brands, our people and our ability 
to deliver for our loyal customers.” 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

3 Strategic Report | Corporate Governance | Financial Statements 
PERFORMANCE SUMMARY 
 
FY24 52 weeks ended 29/12/24 
FY23 52 weeks ended 31/12/23 
Revenue  
£m 
 
Adjusted 
operating 
profit/(loss)1 
£m 
 
Statutory 
operating 
(loss)/profit 
£m 
 
Revenue  
£m 
 
Adjusted 
operating 
profit/(loss)1 
£m 
 
Statutory 
operating 
profit/(loss) 
£m 
 
Greene King pubs 
966.5  
135.7  
120.2  
938.4 
121.7 
132.5 
Destination Brands 
799.2  
44.4  
(111.5)  
787.4 
47.5 
51.8 
Partnerships & Ventures 
447.0  
83.2  
47.1  
420.9 
78.3 
45.3 
Brewing & Brands 
237.8  
19.4  
18.1  
228.7 
21.3 
21.0 
Corporate 
-  
(84.7)  
(90.3)  
- 
(82.7) 
(83.4) 
Group Total 
2,450.5  
198.0  
(16.4)  
2,375.4 
186.1 
167.2 
1. 
Adjusted measures exclude the impact of adjusting items, for details see APMs on page 104. 
 
The presented performance covers the 52 weeks to 29 December 2024 and is compared to the previously reported and audited, 52 
weeks ended 31 December 2023.  
 
Greene King is one of the country’s leading pub and brewing companies with c.2,600 pubs, restaurants and hotels across England, Wales 
and Scotland.  
 
Group revenue was up 3.2% (prior period: 9.1%) to £2,450.5m, with revenues up in all four reporting segments - Greene King pubs, 
Destination Brands, Partnerships & Ventures and Brewing & Brands.  
 
The group made an operating profit before adjusting items of £198.0m (prior period: £186.1m). This year-on-year increase in profit has 
been driven by sales growth and improvement in adjusted operating profit margin as we have continued to drive cost efficiency in the 
business to abate remaining cost headwinds, in particular team costs driven by significant National Living Wage and National Minimum 
Wage increases.  
 
The statutory operating loss was £16.4m, down from a profit of £167.2m in the prior period. The reduction in statutory profit is primarily 
due to an increase in cost from adjusting items compared to the prior year, which was largely driven by an impairment charge of £219.9m 
of some of the group’s assets including goodwill, property plant and equipment and right of use assets. Additionally, there are one-off 
costs from restructuring the organisation, as we move from the “build” to “run” phase, of £13.0m which is partially offset by increased 
profit on disposal of assets of £9.3m. The impairment of assets has been impacted by the uncertain outlook for the hospitality industry 
compounded by the government’s Autumn Budget along with a significant increase in gilt yields reflecting the inflationary pressures in the 
economy. This has driven the group’s discount rate from 8.6% to 9.1%.  
 
Group adjusted net interest costs increased by 7.1% to £130.7m. Lease interest costs rose by £1.2m and debt interest costs rose by 
£7.5m reflecting the increase in interest rates during the year which have been driven by inflationary pressures in the UK economy.  
 
The group made a statutory loss before tax of £147.1m (prior period: £45.2m profit).  
Investment in the estate continued, although as we moved to leverage the investment in recent years our capex reduced, as reflected 
by total core capital expenditure for the group of £172.7m which is down on the prior year (prior period: £194.8m). The approach to 
investment was a balanced mix of spend on asset maintenance, EBITDA maintenance and EBITDA growth.  
 

4 
OUR BUSINESS MODEL 
 
2024 saw the conclusion of a number of transformational initiatives that the business has been working on since we set out our strategy in 2021. 
We announced the development of our new custom-built brewery, and we continued to invest in digital, including updating our app, websites 
and Wi-Fi. From a brand perspective, three new brand trials launched in the year and further rollouts were completed in our Hickory’s investment 
from our existing estate.  
 
Brands – Establishing compelling brands for long-term sustainable growth  
• 
We continued to grow our Franchise business, with a total of 74 sites at the end of the year, through our existing Hive pub model and 
also the launch of our new concept Nest pubs where we completed 10 sites which have a more wet-led offer and are predominantly 
located on busy high streets and in communities.  
• 
We further rolled out our evolved existing brands with investment in Greene King pubs and Chef & Brewer. 
• 
In addition, we rolled out another site in our premium brand Crafted Pubs, with the Crown Inn, Penn bringing this format up to seven 
sites in total.  
• 
We continue to trial new concepts, as we look to learn from bringing new and different experiences to our customers.   
 
Culture – Creating a culture and environment through development programmes, investment in tools and training and use of 
our balanced scorecard giving our teams the freedom to succeed 
• 
Our commitment to inclusion and diversity is unwavering and is at the heart of our culture. Our journey towards ‘Everyday Inclusion’ 
continued, and this year we invested in upskilling our teams to enable their own inclusion journeys. We delivered additional reverse 
mentoring programmes, as well as our Leading Inclusively programme for managers within our business. We launched the Ethnic Future 
Leaders Programme, aimed at nurturing the career progression of high potential team members who self-identify as belonging to a 
diverse ethnic background. By the end of 2024, Black, Asian, and ethnic minorities made up 8.34% of our workforce, progressing 
towards our goal of 10% by 2030. 
 
 
 
 
Managing cost inflation and 
building sustainable 
processes 
Turbocharge the digital 
experience for our guests 
and teams 
Unlock value through 
making the most of our 
assets 
Through innovation and 
targeted acquisitions 
 
Supporting our 
communities and reducing 
our environmental impact  
and reducing our 
environmental impact 
Invest in our people 
Transform our culture 
Grow reach through a 
balanced portfolio of 
compelling profitable brands 
Resources and relationships 
we rely on to… 
…operate the UK’s largest integrated Pub 
Company and Brewer… 
… in pursuit of our purpose to 
pour happiness into lives 
We put customers at the heart of our 
decision making and strive to serve 
more customers, delighting them every 
time 
We are a business for everyone, 
investing in our teams to grow 
skills or a fulfilling career in 
hospitality 
We make it easy for our 
teams to consistently deliver 
outstanding experiences for 
every customer through 
every interaction in an 
efficient way  
Our business model delivers 
consistent returns through a 
balanced portfolio and cash 
generation to fund growth 
We create a culture of pride in our 
business as a positive contributor to 
our communities and our environment 
More than 40,000 talented team 
members (on average over the year) 
and over 900 pub partners across the 
UK
A network of trusted 
suppliers providing us with 
the resources and goods 
we need to run our pub 
and brewing businesses 
sustainably 
The engaged communities 
which we operate in the 
UK and the support of 
government and trade 
bodies 
The estate of pub and brewing 
assets we own and operate across 
the UK and the sector leading 
brands that reflect our rich heritage 
Managing cost inflation and 
building sustainable 
processes 
Turbocharge the digital 
experience for our guests 
and teams 
Unlock value through 
making the most of our 
assets 
Through innovation and 
targeted acquisitions 
 
Supporting our 
communities and reducing 
our environmental impact  
and reducing our 
environmental impact 
Invest in our people 
Transform our culture 
Grow reach through a 
balanced portfolio of 
compelling profitable brands 
Resources and relationships 
we rely on to… 
…operate the UK’s largest integrated Pub 
Company and Brewer… 
… in pursuit of our purpose to 
pour happiness into lives 
We put customers at the heart of our 
decision making and strive to serve 
more customers, delighting them every 
time 
We are a business for everyone, 
investing in our teams to grow 
skills or a fulfilling career in 
hospitality 
We make it easy for our 
teams to consistently deliver 
outstanding experiences for 
every customer through 
every interaction in an 
efficient way  
Our business model delivers 
consistent returns through a 
balanced portfolio and cash 
generation to fund growth 
We create a culture of pride in our 
business as a positive contributor to 
our communities and our environment 
An average of 40,500 talented team 
members (on average over the year) 
and over 900 pub partners across the 
UK
A network of trusted 
suppliers providing us with 
the resources and goods 
we need to run our pub 
and brewing businesses 
sustainably 
The engaged communities 
which we operate in the 
UK and the support of 
government and trade 
bodies 
The estate of pub and brewing 
assets we own and operate across 
the UK and the sector leading 
brands that reflect our rich heritage 

5 Strategic Report | Corporate Governance | Financial Statements 
• 
We continued our commitment to sharing lived experiences of our minority populations. Supported by our annual Inclusion and 
Diversity calendar, we recognised and celebrated many inclusion topics with events, awareness campaigns and learning opportunities 
for our teams across International Women’s Day, Menopause Cafés, the Windrush Exhibition in our pubs, and showcased our 
partnership with Dattie’s Soul Food again in our Black History Month and South Asian Heritage Month events. Aligned to our wellbeing 
plan, we supported different causes highlighted by our ELIGs including mental health campaigns, Andy’s Man Club, Burnt Chef Project, 
and the Switchboard helpline for whom we raised £50,000 enabling them to continue to offer needed and valuable support to the 
LGBTQIA+ community. 
• 
We moved from Bronze to Silver accreditation with WiHTL on their Equity, Diversity & Inclusion (EDI) maturity curve. 
• 
We launched our senior management team development programme, to retain and advance our future talent, including the aim of 
achieving 50% female representation in senior management roles by 2030. We partnered with external experts to drive innovation 
through collaborative efforts, ensuring that our teams explore new ideas and approaches, enhancing their skills and expertise. We 
maintained 31.5% female representation in our leadership group and increased board representation from 27% to 40%. 
• 
We launched our partnership with MOBOLISE, the career development platform, born from the iconic MOBO organisation to 
champion opportunity and diversity in hospitality. The MOBOLISE platform showcases available positions from across Greene King to 
MOBOLISE users, and we have plans to expand on this in 2025 with further collaboration.  
• 
Additionally in our efforts to remove bias in our hiring processes, we launched Hiring Inclusively training which is completed by Hiring 
Managers prior to recruiting; and now share interview questions in advance to internal candidates to help our teams be at their best 
and increase our internal mobility efforts.  
• 
Investment in our culture and people resulted in our Engagement survey showing Sustainable Engagement of 85% and team turnover 
improved 9 ppts to 57%. 
• 
We won a number of awards during the year, including Best Apprenticeship Strategy at Springboard Awards, CEO Nick Mackenzie 
being listed as No1 Advocate in Involve HERoes list, and the business being recognised in Britain’s Most Admired Companies. 
 
People – Transform our culture and our team’s experience to enable them to deliver our goal  
• 
We embedded SmartRecruiters, our new recruitment platform, and invested in our careers social media presence, which significantly 
enhanced our talent attraction. We celebrated industry recognition through awards for Best In-House Attraction Team at the 
Recruitment Marketing Awards and Best Peer Nominated Recruitment Online award at the National Online Recruitment Awards. 
• 
We aligned our front-end attraction videos, recruitment processes, and tools to embed our Service Foundations initiative, ensuring 
we recruit teams to deliver great customer experiences. The launch of our Easy Apply functionality for pub roles also ensures 
candidates get the best application experience. 
• 
We launched an in-pub career pathway programme, designed to provide clear progression opportunities for pub team members, 
fostering talent retention and motivation.  
• 
We rolled out Attensi, a gamified learning experience platform, for our in-pub teams. This has introduced engaging, interactive training 
for pub-based teams to enhance skill development and knowledge retention.  
• 
We established a new learning governance process, implementing robust frameworks for prioritising, monitoring and evaluating learning 
initiatives across the business including supporting roll out and design of new legislative policy i.e. sexual harassment training. 
• 
We launched a new induction programme for our Pub Leadership Teams and improved the training undertaken by all team members 
in order to give a better induction experience.  
• 
To further enhance our culture, we improved leadership accountability through in-pub management development programmes and 
bespoke leadership programmes using 360 feedback tools and launched a set of competencies expected of our leadership group. 
• 
We launched a number of new policies for our team members during the year, including an enhanced Paternity Policy, Fertility and IVF 
Treatment Policy, Carers Leave for Dependents including Emergency Leave Policy and a Sabbatical Policy 
 
Environment and Social – Supporting our communities, giving people better lives through our work with Macmillan and 
reducing our environmental impact  
• 
We celebrated the incredible milestone of over £20 million raised for Macmillan Cancer Support since 2012, including £3.9 million 
raised in 2024 – our highest amount raised in one year. The achievements of this partnership were recognised by the Business Charity 
Awards award for Most Effective Long-Term Partnership. 
• 
We also won the Sustainability Award at MCA Hospitality Awards and Best Sustainable Pub Company at the Publican Awards  
• 
We continued to deliver on our commitment to reach net zero by 2040 by deepening our collaborative engagement with key food 
and drink suppliers and widening our supplier engagement programme to include property and goods not for resale suppliers. This 
included a specific focus on deforestation. 
• 
We engaged communities by sponsoring the Eden Project Communities Big Lunch, hosted over 300 community events in our venues 
in June, and gave away 2,000 meals at Christmas as part of our Christmas Community tables programme.  
• 
We celebrated our first prison leaver apprentice through our programme and launched two more Prison Training Academies. 
• 
Supported over 18,000 apprenticeships since 2011, with an apprentice having worked in 97% of pubs.  
• 
We made significant process in embedding our sustainability programme and enhancing our governance processes. We released a new 
sustainability policy, supporting our commitment to proactively assess and mitigate environmental, social, and governance risks to 
ensure long-term sustainability and resilience in our operations. 
 
Expand – Building a balanced portfolio of sustainable brands through targeted acquisitions and innovation  
• 
Having invested in Hickory’s in 2022 we continued the expansion of this exciting portfolio enhancing brand by opening a further 6 sites 
in 2024 bringing the total number of sites to 30. This remains an area of future investment with planning of future sites well underway. 
The brand continues to perform extremely well, delivering a strong return on capital post conversion. 
 
 
 
 

6 
Assets – Making the most of our assets, maximising their potential   
• 
We improved our customer experience by investing £147m into capital projects in our pub estate, enhancing the quality of our assets and our 
brands particularly across Greene King pubs and Chef & Brewer. This included the movement of 20 managed pubs to new trading formats to 
better serve the customers their communities and 21 pubs into our Franchise formats in our Pub Partners division. The 2024 openings delivered 
strong returns and there is a healthy pipeline of available assets moving forwards. 
• 
Our EV charging rollout continued with charging points available at 20% of our managed sites covering 1,450 bays – enhancing our 
assets and providing vital infrastructure to our customers and team members. 
 
Digital – Build meaningful relationships with customers through digital and make it easy for them to connect with us  
• 
We launched the new Greene King app, providing an enhanced customer experience, a seamless order & pay journey, with 2.5m 
people having already downloaded it. This resulted in an improved operational experience around wait times for our customers. The 
new app provides the foundation to leverage our customer data, increasing our known customers and personalising their experience 
to complement their visit. 
• 
We completed delivery of the Customer Engagement transformation programme, which oversaw development of a single customer 
view database and integrated marketing automation platform, leading to known customer data growth and increased frequency from 
targeted customer relationship management (CRM) activities to millions of customers. 
• 
We undertook further development of our website and WiFi merchandising strategy following re-platforming in 2023 to drive 
authenticity, personalisation and optimisation, driving increased website engagement and conversion including an increase of 15% year 
on year for online bookings. 
 
Operational Excellence – Drive innovation and cost efficiency creating sustainably lower costs and ways of operating  
• 
We have recently restructured our Executive Board and Central Support teams to be more agile and efficient. To support our 
continued business desire to drive innovation and reduce costs for the start of 2025 we have established a new function called ‘Efficiency 
and Innovation’. This team has a clear remit to establish the most effective operating models and cost to serve plans for Greene King 
and gives us a real advantage over prior years to be even more effective in our cost to serve delivery programmes.  
• 
In sites where we have installed voltage optimisation equipment, we have seen a 6% reduction in electricity consumption. Alongside 
this we have also started to rollout intelligent dispensing solutions which improve quality and yield compliance. These will both continue 
into 2025. 
• 
Our Operational Excellence forum has been expanded to align governance and with clear accountability for the plan and how this will 
be executed in future years. This ensures that all teams are invested in the plan and working towards efficiency for our operations 
teams. 

7 Strategic Report | Corporate Governance | Financial Statements 
DIVISIONAL PERFORMANCE  
 
During the year, we announced changes to the structure of the group’s internal organisation. The way the financial and management 
information was presented to the board and the executive board (which consists of the Chief Executive Officer, Chief Operating Officer, 
Chief Financial Officer, Chief Experience Officer and three divisional Managing Directors) remains unchanged until the end of FY24 and 
therefore the group’s reporting segments remain consistent year on year with activities being reported under four segments: Greene King 
pubs, Destination Brands, Partnerships & Ventures and Brewing & Brands. 
 
The composition of the group’s reporting segments changed at the start of FY25 which will mean Partnerships & Ventures will no longer 
be a standalone division, and the group will move from four divisions to three: Greene King pubs; Destination Brands and Ventures; and 
Brewing and Brands. The new structure will simplify and strengthen the business and support the group’s long-term plans. 
 
GREENE KING PUBS  
Greene King pubs is our mainstream pub brand, with a clear ambition to be the Nation’s Most Loved Pub Brand. These pubs are located 
in the heart of communities, high streets and cities across the country, providing hospitality and a home away from home to tens of 
thousands of customers every day. The Greene King brand has a rich history and is a favourite among consumers. We want to build on 
this to create a more distinct Greene King pubs brand which heroes our great people, fantastic pubs, outstanding experiences and high-
quality, own-brewed beers. Greene King pubs has a unique identity and a clear role to build lasting value over time. It will complement 
our existing portfolio of brands, each of which play an important role for us in key segments of the market. We will have a customer-led 
approach at the centre of our offering, making sure Greene King pubs are top of minds for all key occasions, so customers naturally 
choose to visit us more often. 
Greene King pubs consists of 878 managed pubs which focus on making customers feel at home; bringing people together; creating a 
friendly and welcoming environment; and taking pride in everything we do.  
Greene King pubs has four business units - Community Pubs, Proper Locals, Urban and Food Pubs.  
 
 
FY24 52 weeks 
ended 29/12/24 
 
FY23 52 weeks 
ended 31/12/23 
 
% change 
No. of pubs 
878
898 
(2.2%) 
Revenue 
£966.5m
£938.4m 
3.0% 
Adjusted EBITDA
1 
£192.9m
£176.0m 
9.6% 
Adjusted operating profit
1 
£135.7m
£121.7m 
11.5% 
Statutory operating profit 
£120.2m
£132.5m 
(9.3%) 
1. Adjusted measures exclude the impact of adjusting items, for details see APMs on page 104. 
Greene King pubs produced strong financial results with adjusted operating profit increasing by 11.5% year-on-year due to strong like 
for like sales (LFL) in 2024 driven by price and effective cost control. Our performance was particularly positive in the year, consistently 
outperforming the market. Statutory operating profit decreased by 9.3% which has been driven by the increase in property, plant and 
equipment and right of use asset impairment. 
As we seek to build a stronger and more consistent Greene King pubs brand, we are focusing on creating strong foundations to ensure 
we have better trained and engaged teams, a key part of our brand. We invested in a service foundations programme which has seen a 
shift in the positive reviews being left by customers and an improved financial performance. We measure customer satisfaction as 
‘Reputation’ on our Dartboard – our balanced scorecard metric, see page 14 - and in 2024 this score increased by 15 points.   
Our engagement survey (Rant and Rave) achieved a 76% response rate with both Sustainable Engagement (85%) and Business Pride (84%) 
remaining broadly stable. Our team turnover improved by a further 10 ppts through the year, and 18 ppts over the last two years. In 
addition, Management Stability improved by 6 ppts over the last 12 months.   
We continued to invest in our estate and accelerated our investment in our Community Pubs and Urban business units. Core investment 
capital expenditure for the year was £31m and we were pleased with the sales and profit performance at these sites. In total 42 Greene 
King pub sites benefitted from core capital investment in the year. We also completed eight transfers in from other areas of the group 
which, in the most part, we invested in as part of the internal move, whilst we transferred out 12 sites to other parts of the group.  
2025 will be an exciting year for Greene King pubs – we will continue to roll out our brand identity, accelerate our investment plan as 
well as exploit new digital tools, including the app, to drive customer reach and volume.

8 
DESTINATION BRANDS 
 
Destination Brands represents a portfolio of distinct brands that provide valuable and memorable experiences across various market 
typologies and occasions within the value and mainstream markets. Our pubs and restaurants serve as a place for friends, families and 
communities to come together, offering great service, quality, and affordability for both dining and drinking occasions. 
 
Each brand within our portfolio serves a specific purpose and plays a crucial role in our overall strategy. The key brands include Hungry 
Horse, Chef & Brewer, Farmhouse Inns, and Flaming Grill. Additionally, the Wacky Warehouse play brand is part of our family, and many 
of our pubs offer accommodation, with over 1,500 rooms available across our total estate. 
 
Our primary focus remains on prioritising the customer experience. We aim to deliver exceptional customer satisfaction through 
continuous brand development. By striving for operational excellence, we ensure our estate evolves through strategic investments in new 
brands while preserving the inherent value of our existing uninvested estate. 
 
 
FY24 52 weeks 
ended 29/12/24 
 
FY23 52 weeks 
ended 31/12/23 
 
% change 
No. of pubs 
580 
600 
(3.3%) 
Revenue 
£799.2m
£787.4m  
1.5%  
Adjusted EBITDA
1 
£88.1m 
          £90.3m  
(2.4%) 
Adjusted operating profit
1 
£44.4m 
          £47.5m  
(6.5%) 
Statutory operating (loss)/profit 
(£111.5m)
          £51.8m  
(315.3%) 
1. Adjusted measures exclude the impact of adjusting items, for details see APMs on page 104.  
 
Total revenue of £799.2m was up £11.8m or 1.5% versus FY23, with like for like (LFL) sales strong, and all brands in growth. LFL food 
sales out-performed drink, with both food and drink sales in growth but led by price increases, with the underlying market remaining 
challenging throughout the year. Despite the challenging market, accommodation sales held up and were also in growth.  
The most notable highlight of 2024 was our market performance as we remained ahead of the market all year with our Farmhouse Inns 
restaurant division leading the way. 
Our statutory operating profit reflected the impact of goodwill impairment of £98.6m in the period. The impairment of assets has been 
impacted by the uncertain outlook for the hospitality industry compounded by the government’s Autumn Budget along with a significant 
increase in gilt yields reflecting the inflationary pressures in the economy. This has driven the group’s discount rate from 8.6% to 9.1%.  
Cost headwinds persisted during the year, affecting team costs and utilities, while the inflationary impact on food costs of goods started 
to decline. The actions taken to improve efficiency and manage cost increases helped limit the erosion of the EBITDA margin. 
Our emphasis on providing an exceptional customer experience, coupled with our investment in the service foundations programme, 
has resulted in significant improvements in our customer metrics for the year, including a 28-point increase in our Reputation score, 
reaching an all-time high. 
Our customer experience and thus the performance of our business is dependent on over 15,000 people who work in Destination 
Brands. We were delighted with the continued improvement in our people metrics notably the improvement in our New Starter 
Retention metric, which was up over 4 ppts and contributed to the overall 9 ppt fall in total team turnover over the course of the year, 
whilst engagement scores continued to be maintained at the high levels seen in the previous year. 
Our capital investment programme continued to deliver strong returns with £14.6m development initiatives in the year on 22 projects.  
Through 2025, our focus will be on further enhancing our brand propositions. This strategy includes investing in both our value brands 
and our mainstream brand. The ongoing brand pilots (as referred to on page 4) will extend into 2025, guiding us in shaping the future of 
our portfolio. We will maintain an unwavering commitment to prioritising our customers and simplifying our operational models to 
reinvest in customer satisfaction. Furthermore, in 2025, we will advance our digital training initiatives to support our most valuable asset 
- our teams - in consistently delivering exceptional customer experiences. 
 
 

9 Strategic Report | Corporate Governance | Financial Statements 
PARTNERSHIPS & VENTURES 
Our Partnerships & Ventures division brings together the Pub Partners business, comprising of our leased and tenanted and franchise pub 
operations, and our Venture businesses, that operate in growth segments in the market, outside of Greene King’s core offer, but which 
continue to leverage the expertise and scale of the group. The division had over 1,100 pubs, restaurants and hotels at the year end with 
revenues of £447.0m and an adjusted EBITDA of £112.2m. 
 
 
FY24 52 weeks
ended 29/12/24
FY23 52 weeks
ended 31/12/23
% change 
No. of pubs 
1,114
1,125
(1.0%) 
Revenue 
£447.0m
£420.9m 
6.2% 
Adjusted EBITDA¹ 
£112.2m 
£106.0m 
5.8% 
Adjusted operating profit¹ 
£83.2m
£78.3m 
6.3% 
Statutory operating profit 
£47.1m
£45.3m 
4.0% 
1. Adjusted measures exclude the impact of adjusting items, for details see APMs on page 104. 
 
The division made significant progress during the year increasing its contribution to the group: 
• 
Our Pub Partners business continues to show robust performance and comprises of 974 quality leased and tenanted pubs that 
continue to generate significant and stable cashflows for the group. Our franchise pubs, which saw significant growth during the 
year, increased to 74 sites. This growth was driven by the continued rollout of our Hive pubs model and the introduction of 
Nest pubs; a franchise model focused on a more wet-led proposition. Both Hive and Nest pubs comprise of well invested assets 
converted from either our leased and tenanted or our fully managed pub estate. The 2024 openings delivered strong returns 
and there is a healthy pipeline of available assets moving forwards. 
• 
Hickory’s Smokehouse, a leading BBQ smokehouse restaurant operator, joined Greene King in October 2022 and now consists 
of 30 restaurants, having successfully converted a further 6 assets from former Greene King sites in 2024. The brand continues 
to perform extremely well, delivering a strong return on capital post conversion. The core business is performing in line with 
expectations, with conversions expected to grow by a further 10 sites during 2025. 
• 
Venture Hotels consists of a collection of 39 quality hotels which brings together our accommodation led assets, led by a 
separate management team focused on maximising returns in this market segment. During 2024 we opened the renovated White 
Horse (Rottingdean), the first hotel trading as part of our new upscale brand Everly Hotels Collection.  
• 
Metropolitan Pub Company has 64 high quality pubs with a large proportion of these assets located in London. The business 
operates a premium food and drink offer in urban and suburban locations. The business continues to focus on elevating the 
customer proposition, delivering outstanding service and driving efficiency in operating margins. In addition, there was targeted 
investment in the year to ensure assets remain of a high quality in line with customer expectations.  
• 
Crafted Pubs, our premium destination dining concept connects two key parts of our strategy, being growth through compelling 
brands and asset optimisation, with assets in more premium demographic areas transferred in from other parts of the managed 
pub estate. Crafted Pubs grew to seven sites during 2024 with the latest opening, The Crown, Penn, opening in October 2024.  
Partnerships & Ventures revenue grew by 6.2% to £447.0m in 2024, which was driven through investment in venture brands, asset 
optimisation and growth in our franchise pub models. 
The division made an adjusted operating profit of £83.2m, which was 6.3% ahead of last year. The increase in profit versus the prior year 
primary reflects the continued investment in Hickory’s and franchise pubs.  
Our statutory operating profit reflected the impact of goodwill impairment of £23.5m in the period. The impairment of assets has been 
impacted by the uncertain outlook for the hospitality industry compounded by the government’s Autumn Budget along with a significant 
increase in gilt yields reflecting the inflationary pressures in the economy. This has driven the group’s discount rate from 8.6% to 9.1%.  
Development capital expenditure for the division totalled £25.8m with investment focused on maintaining and improving the quality of 
assets in the core estate and optimising assets through conversions and brand building investments.  
 
As noted on page 7 at the start of 2025 the Partnerships business moved into Greene King pubs and the Ventures division into Destination 
Brands and became Destination Venture Brands, as a result Partnerships & Ventures will not be a standalone division going forward. Both 
Partnerships and Ventures remain an important part of the strategic direction of the group, looking forward we expect to continue to 
invest in asset optimisation and expand our Venture Brands. This will include the continued rollout of the Hickory’s brand and plans to 
build presence through our premium operations. We also will continue to grow our franchise estate and support our leased and tenanted 
partners with significant investment into the estate. 

10 
BREWING & BRANDS 
 
Brewing & Brands brews, sells and distributes a diverse portfolio of beers manufactured from its two distinct breweries in Bury St Edmunds 
and Dunbar, in addition to wholesaling other brand owner products into various markets. The business supplies drinks into the entire 
Greene King estate, as well as trading with external customers through multiple different selling channels spanning the on trade, off trade 
and export markets. 
 
 
FY24 52 weeks 
ended 29/12/24 
 
FY23 52 weeks 
ended 31/12/23 
 
% change 
Revenue
2 
    £237.8m  
£228.7m 
4.0%  
Adjusted EBITDA
1 
£31.2m  
£32.2m  
(3.1%) 
Adjusted operating profit
1 
£19.4m  
£21.3m  
(8.9%) 
Statutory operating profit 
£18.1m  
£21.0m  
(13.8%) 
1. Adjusted measures exclude the impact of adjusting items, for details see APMs on page 104. 
2. Revenue disclosed is entirely in relation to third party customers. 
 
Revenue of £237.8m was up 4.0% versus FY23 with adjusted operating profit at £19.4m, down 8.9%. Revenue growth was driven by price 
with overall volumes decreasing. Despite softer market-wide trading conditions, which have seen an overall decline in total beer volumes 
versus the prior year, the division achieved volume growth in two of its markets, the English free trade (+1%) and off trade (+2%).  
 
Adjusted operating profit continues to be challenged by inflation, while beginning to stabilise and subside from levels seen in 2023, it 
remained above historical norms. A focus on operational efficiencies, cost control measures and a reduction in marketing investment, 
served to mitigate the majority of inflation absorbed, particularly in the cost of products supplied by other producers, raw materials, 
canning, utilities, labour and third-party distribution. 
 
Across the year, the division maintained a close focus on its customer-first approach, demonstrated most notably in achieving the number 
one ranking for UK Beer and Cider Suppliers, as voted by Tesco, in the 2024 Advantage Survey. Many of our beers, old and new, also 
attained independent recognition, earning multiple awards across our portfolio. A key highlight included 2* Great Taste Award for Old 
Crafty Hen and 1* for Old Master Hen. 
 
Strong growth in ‘Premium Beers’ remains a priority, to increase the presence of modern beer styles and branding to enhance our exposure 
to future profitable growth categories. Premium Beer volumes grew 21% in FY24 supported by a significant marketing investment 
programme. Greene King held its position in the craft market at number four and increased share from 5.5% to 5.7%, and was one of 
relatively few brewers to do so in the top 10, remaining behind only Heineken, Budweiser and BrewDog. 
 
Protecting core brands in the declining traditional/cask ale categories also remains a focus and, in the off trade, our volume share of the 
traditional ale market grew from 18.0% to 19.0%, demonstrating the strength and resilience of Greene King brands. In the on trade, Greene 
King became the number one cask ale brewer in Great Britain in 2024. 
 
Our annual team member engagement survey was completed with over 600 participants taking part in the survey, achieving a response 
rate of 84%. Our Sustainable Engagement and Business Pride results remained broadly in line with the prior year.  
 
The division invested over £20m in capital projects during the year, up £6m year on year and included the purchase of land to develop the 
new £40 million custom-built brewery, which we announced in April 2024 and secured planning permission on in January 2025. We also 
invested in cellar services assets and into the new Bury St Edmunds warehouse and IT. 
 
Looking ahead to 2025, the business remains committed to building on its strong foundations by driving further growth in premium beer 
volumes and growing market share in both the on and off trade markets. In addition, the new brewery project is now beginning to gather 
pace with the build phase to commence in 2025, which will set the foundations for the next chapter in our rich brewing heritage. 
 
 
 
 

11 Strategic Report | Corporate Governance | Financial Statements 
FINANCIAL REVIEW 
Income Statement 
 
 
Statutory 
Adjusted1 
 
52 weeks  
29 December 
2024 
52 weeks  
31 December 
2023 
YoY 
change  
52 weeks  
29 December 
2024 
52 weeks  
31 December 
2023 
YoY 
change 
 
£m 
£m 
 
 £m 
£m 
 
Revenue 
2,450.5 
2,375.4 
3.2%
2,450.5 
2,375.4 
3.2%
Operating (loss)/profit 
(16.4) 
167.2 
(109.8%)
198.0 
186.1 
6.4%
Net finance costs 
(130.7) 
(122.0) 
7.1%
(130.7) 
(122.3) 
6.9%
 (Loss)/profit before tax 
(147.1) 
45.2 
 (425.4%)
 67.3 
63.8 
    5.5%
1. Adjusted measures exclude the impact of adjusting items, for details see APMs on page 104 and note 5 for adjusting items.  
Revenue was £2,450.5m, an increase of 3.2% compared to the 52 weeks ending 31 December 2023, with increases in all four revenue 
generating segments versus the prior period primarily driven by pricing 
• 
Greene King pubs revenue was up 3.0% to £966.5m 
• 
Destination Brands revenue was up 1.5% to £799.2m 
• 
Partnerships & Ventures revenue was up 6.2% to £447.0m 
• 
Brewing & Brands revenue was up 4.0% to £237.8m.  
Adjusted corporate costs of £84.7m (prior period: £82.7m) are broadly flat year on year. Statutory corporate costs of £90.3m are up 
£6.9m on the prior period largely due to costs associated with restructuring the organisation of £13.0m and other corporate transaction 
and project costs of £1.8m, offset by profit on disposal of corporate unlicenced properties £9.6m.  
The Group’s Adjusted operating profit increased by 6.4% to £198.0m. 
The group’s statutory operating profit declined during 2024 compared to 2023 primarily due to impairment of some of the group’s assets 
including goodwill, property plant and equipment and right of use assets, see further details below in the balance sheet section.  
Net finance costs before adjusting items were up 7.1% to £130.7m, primarily due to the increase in interest rates seen during the year.  
Tax – total taxes of £544m were paid in the year, up £26m on 2023  
The effective rate of corporation tax (before adjusting items) for the group is 27.9% (prior period: 24.8%) compared with the UK 
corporation tax rate of 25%. Adjustments to the rate are driven by non-adjusting accounting movements on property, plant and equipment 
(+2.2%) and right of use assets (+0.7%). This resulted in a tax charge against operating profits (before adjusting items) of £18.8m (prior 
period: £15.8m). The adjusting tax credit of £12.4m (prior period: £10.7m) is discussed under adjusting items. 
The group generates revenue, profits and employment that deliver substantial tax revenues for the UK government in the form of VAT, 
duties, employment taxes and corporation tax. In the year, total tax revenues paid by the group were c.£544m (prior period: c.£518m). 
The group’s tax policy, which has been approved by the group’s board committee, and which will be subject to regular review by the board 
of directors of the group, has the objective of ensuring that the group fulfils its obligations as a responsible UK taxpayer. 
Adjusting Items 
Adjusting items were a charge of £216.0m (prior period: £7.9m), consisting of a £214.4m (prior period: £18.9m) charge to operating profit, 
a £nil (prior period: £0.3m) credit to finance costs and a net adjusting tax credit of £9.6m (prior period: £10.7m). Items recognised in the 
year included the following: 
 
1. 
A net impairment charge on property, plant and equipment and right-of-use assets of £86.4m (prior period: £16.7m).  
2. 
£13.0m (prior period: £1.8m) of restructuring costs and other legal and professional fees.  
3. 
£9.3m net profit (prior period: loss £4.2m) on disposal of property, plant and equipment, leases and investment property.  
4. 
£1.8m charge (prior period: £2.2m) in respect of professional fees on corporate transactions and projects.  
5. 
A gain of £0.3m (prior period: £1.6m) in respect of the revaluation of investment property.  
6. 
£0.3m credit in respect of insurance proceeds relating to damaged assets (prior period: £4.1m).  
7. 
A goodwill impairment charge of £121.1m (prior period: £nil) relating to Destination Brands and Partnerships & Ventures.  
8. 
An exceptional depreciation charge of £1.0m (prior period: £nil) in respect of accelerated depreciation on brewery assets following 
the announcement of the group’s plan to build a new custom-built brewery.  
9. 
The adjusting tax credit of £12.4m (prior period: £10.7m) is made up of a tax credit of £21.5m on the above adjusting items, offset 
by an adjusting tax charge of £9.1m which predominately represents the impact of final capital allowances claims and an adjustment 
for right-of-use assets.  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

12 
Cashflow  
 
52 weeks ended  
29 December 2024  
£m  
52 weeks ended 
31 December 2023 
£m 
Adjusted EBITDA¹ 
353.0 
329.2 
Working capital (excluding adjusting cash items)  
1.8 
42.7 
Net interest paid² 
(110.0) 
(102.1) 
Tax paid  
(5.1) 
(13.9) 
Adjusted cash generated from operations² 
239.7 
255.9 
Core capital expenditure  
(172.7) 
(194.8) 
Net repayment of trade loans  
(0.7) 
- 
Repayment of lease liabilities  
(53.7) 
(51.5) 
Free cash flow² 
12.6 
9.6 
Investment property expenditure  
(5.7) 
(1.1) 
Net disposal proceeds 
25.2 
4.4 
New build capital expenditure and freehold purchases 
(28.4) 
(29.9) 
Adjusting items 
(11.5) 
25.0 
(Repayment)/advance of borrowings  
(7.8) 
24.6 
Net (decrease)/increase in cash and cash equivalents  
(15.6) 
32.6 
1. 
Adjusted EBITDA represents earnings before interest, tax, depreciation, amortisation and adjusting items, for details see APMs on page 104.  
 
2. 
Adjusted measures excluding the impact of adjusting items, for details see APMs on page 104. 
The full year adjusted cash inflow from operations was £239.7m (prior period: £255.9m) demonstrating the strength of the group’s trading 
performance despite a challenging economic environment and a range of ongoing cost headwinds. The group generated a free cash flow of 
£12.6m (prior period: £9.6m). Overall, the cash outflow for the period was £15.6m (prior period: inflow £32.6m) after funding capital 
expenditure of £206.8m (prior period: £225.8m) and rent payments of £53.7m (prior period: £51.5m). A net cash outflow on adjusting 
items of £11.5m primarily related to payments made as part of the group restructure in Q4 2024 and deferred consideration payments in 
respect of the 2022 acquisition of Hickory’s (prior period: £25.0m primarily relating to cash received from HMRC in relation to VAT on 
gaming machine income). 
There was a net cash repayment (excluding arrangement fees) of borrowings during the year of £7.8m (prior period: advance of £24.6m). 
The group delivered a full programme of core maintenance and development capital expenditure including investment in a range of 
transformation and asset optimisation projects. The group’s non-core capital expenditure programme included investment to grow the 
Hickory’s brand via conversions of existing assets, as well as the purchase of freehold land for the purpose of developing the group’s new 
custom-built brewery site. Net disposal proceeds of £25.2m were generated from the disposal of various non-core assets.  
In order to support its long-term strategic priorities, the group’s objective is to maximise the strength and flexibility of its balance sheet, 
and to maintain a capital structure which meets the short, medium, and long-term funding requirements of the business. The principal 
elements of the group’s capital structure are its £1,100m bank facilities, which were £955m drawn at the year end, a £1,500m revolving 
loan facility with CKA Holdings UK Limited, which was fully undrawn at the year end, a £311m loan advance from CKA Holdings UK 
Limited, and a long-term asset-backed financing vehicle which has bonds outstanding with a nominal value of £964.7m.  
In April 2024 the group extended the maturity of its unsecured revolving loan facility with CKA Holdings UK Limited to November 2028. 
In December 2024 CKA Holdings UK Limited provided a £311m interest-free, repayable on demand loan advance to the group, which was 
used to repay in full the drawn balance under the revolving loan facility. The existing £1,500m revolving loan facility remains in place and is 
fully undrawn at the balance sheet date.    
In October 2024 the group executed a new 5-year £100m term loan facility with The Hongkong and Shanghai Banking Corporation. The 
purpose of the facility was to restore bank facility headroom which had been depleted by scheduled principal repayments under the Greene 
King securitisation bonds, in the context of the majority of the group’s cash generated from operations having been reinvested through 
capital expenditure during the year. 
In December 2024 the group executed a new five-year £200m term loan facility with Industrial and Commercial Bank of China (Asia) 
Limited (ICBC). The purpose of the facility was to refinance a £200m revolving credit facility with Scotiabank which was repaid in full in 
December 2024 upon its maturity. 
At the year end, the Greene King securitisation had secured bonds with a group carrying value of £957.8m (prior period: £1,019.5m) and 
an average life of six years (prior period: seven years), secured against 1,436 pubs (prior period: 1,460 pubs) with a group property, plant 
and equipment carrying value of £1,980.m (prior period: £2,019.2m).  
The group maintained covenant compliance in the Greene King securitisation throughout 2024, with all financial covenants being passed in 
respect of each of the March 2024, June 2024, September 2024 and December 2024 test dates.  
The group’s liquidity position remains strong reflecting the resilience of the group’s capital structure. The group’s average cash cost of debt 
increased to 5.1% from 5.0% last period, and at the year end 59.9% of the group’s net debt was at a fixed rate. The Greene King secured 
vehicle had a four-quarter lookback FCF DSCR of 1.5x at the year end, giving 73% headroom to the covenant limit of 1.1x.  
Overall, the group’s net debt excluding lease liabilities marginally increased by £8.6m to £2,117.7m. 

13 Strategic Report | Corporate Governance | Financial Statements 
 
 
Balance sheet  
 
 
29 December 2024 
£m 
31 December 2023 
£m 
Goodwill and other intangibles 
816.4 
940.0 
Property, plant and equipment (inc. investment property and assets held for sale) 
3,969.1 
3,990.6 
Post-employment assets 
48.4 
64.5 
Net debt (excluding lease liabilities)  
(2,117.7) 
(2,109.1) 
Derivative financial instruments 
(13.9) 
(30.7) 
Trade and other payables  
(450.1) 
(459.6) 
Net IFRS 16 liability  
(62.1) 
(54.8) 
Other net assets 
143.7 
150.9 
Net assets 
2,333.8 
2,491.8 
Share capital and premium  
 
1,223.4 
 
1,223.4 
Reserves 
1,110.4 
1,268.4 
Total equity 
2,333.8 
2,491.8 
Goodwill and other intangibles  
Goodwill and other intangibles reduced by £123.6m year on year, with £122.2m of this movement as a result of impairment of goodwill in 
respect of the Destination Brands and Partnerships & Ventures divisions. The impairment of assets has been impacted by the uncertain 
outlook for the hospitality industry compounded by the government’s Autumn Budget along with a significant increase in gilt yields reflecting 
the inflationary pressures in the economy. This has driven the group’s discount rate from 8.6% to 9.1%.  
Property plant and equipment  
Property plant and equipment remained flat year on year despite an in-year impairment charge of £85.1m and depreciation of £115.6m. 
This is due to the group’s continued investment in its estate, digital initiatives and brewery operations. In April 2024 the group announced 
its plans to build a new custom-built brewery, and planning permission for the new brewery was granted in January 2025 following the 
purchase of land and submission of the planning application during 2024.  
Derivative financial instruments  
The net liability position on the group’s derivative financial instruments has reduced year on year due to an increase in market interest 
rates.  
Pensions 
The group has two defined benefit schemes, which are closed to new entrants and to future accrual. 
At 29 December 2024, there was an IAS 19 net pension asset of £48.4m representing a decrease of £16.1m since 31 December 2023. The 
closing assets of the group’s two pension schemes totalled £561.2m and closing liabilities were £512.8m compared to £629.0m and £564.5m 
respectively at the previous period end. Included in the remeasurement are key assumptions relating to the discount rate of 5.5% (prior 
period: 4.5%), RPI inflation of 3.2% (prior period: 3.1%) and CPI inflation of 2.7% (prior period: 2.5%). Following the funding valuation in 
2022 it was agreed company contributions to the Greene King pension scheme would be made into escrow, and total cash contributions 
the period were £3.2m into escrow (prior period: £3.5m).  
Dividend 
No dividend was proposed by the board in the current or prior period.  
 
 

14 
KEY PERFORMANCE INDICATORS 
The group uses a balanced scorecard, called the Dartboard to assess the performance of the group. There are a number of Dartboards 
used across the business; there is at least one per division and one for the group. The metrics disclosed in the tables below are based on 
the group Dartboard.  
There are 15 key performance indicators (KPIs) reported in the Dartboard that are structured around five pillars which promote our 
strategic objectives around people, operations, customers and pride as ways to target sustainable financial outcomes. Each KPI is measured 
using a blue, red, amber, green (BRAG) system on a periodic and year to date basis. A large number of the KPIs are measured against 
budget or an internal or external metric, but to demonstrate how we measure the performance of the business, one KPI per pillar has 
been set out and commented on in the table below. The KPIs selected are those that have most relevance and meaning to an external 
reader based on how the KPI is measured.  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
FINANCIAL  
FINANCIAL  
Adjusted operating profit¹ (£m) 
Free Cash Flow (£m)¹ 
Adjusted operating profit is reconciled on page 51. 
Free cash flow is reconciled on page 104. 
2024 
£198.0m 
 
2024 
£12.6m 
 
2023 
£186.1m 
 
2023 
£9.6m 
 
2022 
£192.6m 
 
2022 
£13.1m 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Summary 
 
 
Summary 
 
 
The group’s adjusted operating profit increased during 2024 compared 
to 2023 predominantly driven by sales growth and cost efficiencies in 
the business despite cost headwinds. 
The group remained cash generative demonstrating the 
strength of the group’s trading performance despite a range of 
ongoing cost headwinds.  
CUSTOMER 
OPERATIONAL EXCELLENCE 
Group sales (year on year) (%) 
Safety & Compliance 
Sales growth or decline measured versus the prior year.  
Measured as an average of each the component metrics for 
each operational division. Divisions with managed pubs are 
assessed on food hygiene scores, Pub Partners on SafeStart 
and Brewing & Brands on RIDDOR (The Reporting of 
Injuries, Diseases and Dangerous Occurrences Regulations) 
accidents. 
2024 
3.2% 
 
2024 
100% 
 
2023 
9.1% 
 
2023 
 100% 
 
2022 
(0.4%) 
 
2022 
100% 
 
 
 
 
 
Summary 
 
Summary 
 
2024 group sales grew with sales up in all four reporting segments.  
All four divisions met their safety targets for the period. 
PEOPLE 
PRIDE 
Sustainable Engagement (%) 
Business Pride Score (%) 
Measured using a sustainable engagement model, which is 3 questions 
in the Willis Towers Watson engagement survey (Rant and Rave)  
Measured using the answer to “I am proud to be associated 
with Greene King” within the Willis Towers Watson 
engagement survey (Rant and Rave) 
 
2024 
85% 
 
2024 
84% 
 
2023 
87% 
 
2023 
85% 
 
2022 
84% 
 
2022 
85% 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Summary 
 
 
Summary 
 
 
The survey indicated that 85% of our employees are engaged, enabled 
and energised, a broadly flat score year on year.  
The survey indicated that 84% of our employees are proud 
to work at Greene King, a consistent score on the prior year.  
 
1. 
Adjusted measures excluding the impact of adjusting items, for details see APMs on page 104 

15 Strategic Report | Corporate Governance | Financial Statements 
DIRECTORS DUTIES UNDER SECTION 172 COMPANIES ACT 2006 
Under section 172 of the Companies Act 2006 the directors of the company are required to act in a way which promotes the long-term 
success of the company and in doing so to consider the interests of the company’s stakeholders. This section of the report is designed to 
set out how the directors have complied with their obligations in this regard. 
The directors of the company have at all times during the period (and at all other times) acted in the way that they considered, in good 
faith, would be most likely to promote the success of the company for the benefit of its members as a whole, and in doing so had regard 
(amongst other matters) to:  
• 
the likely consequences of any decision in the long-term,  
• 
the interests of the company’s employees,  
• 
the need to foster the company’s business relationships with suppliers, customers and others,  
• 
the impact of the company’s operations on the community and the environment,  
• 
the desirability of the company maintaining a reputation for high standards of business conduct, and  
• 
the need to act fairly between members of the company. 
Engaging with stakeholders. The success of our business is dependent on the support of all of our stakeholders. Building positive 
relationships with stakeholders that share our values is important to us and working together towards shared goals assists us in delivering 
long-term sustainable success. The group’s key stakeholders are as follows: 
 
Shareholders. The company is a wholly owned subsidiary of CK Asset Holdings Limited (CKA), a limited liability company incorporated 
in the Cayman Islands, registered in Hong Kong, and listed on the Main Board of the Hong Kong Stock Exchange. The board has continued 
to ensure that there is appropriate engagement by the company with CKA. Certain members of the board of CKA receive copies of the 
company’s board meeting packs and are invited to attend and ask questions at the company’s board meetings; this ensures that there is 
direct contact between the two boards and that the company’s parent is fully informed of the company’s activities. As well as an update 
from the company’s CEO, the company’s board receives and reviews reports on the company’s financial performance, on matters relating 
to employees and on audit and risk related matters. 
Team members. Our people are our greatest asset with an average of around 40,500 team members employed across the group during 
the year. Attracting and retaining the best people and developing and investing in them is critical to our continued success.  
Key areas of focus for the business in relation to team members this year included a harmonisation of terms and conditions and a re-
organisation of support centre structures, as well as recruitment, retention, health and wellbeing, development opportunities, pay and 
benefits.  
Staff turnover fell during the year due to our culture change programme, which created a much-improved working environment, and the 
improvements in our employee proposition.  
Inclusion and diversity across the business has continued its momentum, particularly within our four Employee-Led Inclusion Groups 
(ELIGs): 
• 
Village Greene – our LGBTQ+ focused employee-led inclusion group 
• 
Unity – our Black, Asian and minority ethnic focused employee-led inclusion group 
• 
Greene Sky – our female focused employee-led inclusion group 
• 
Ability – our disability focused employee-led inclusion group 
Each ELIG has an executive board member sponsor, and, given the restructure, some new appointments will be made in 2025. The ELIGs 
provide an important forum for raising awareness of issues and concerns facing the community they represent. Examples from 2024 include 
hosting events in our support centres for South Asian Heritage Month, supporting the social history of the Windrush Generation into our 
pubs during Black History month by creating the ‘Windrush Front Room’ exhibit, the announcement of our inclusive Fertility & IVF 
Treatment policy as the latest addition to our suite of family-friendly policies, and collaborating to release the Moving Forwards podcast 
mini-series for mental health awareness week. We also continued our inclusion podcast series, 'Pint of Perspective,' to support diverse 
recruitment efforts and engage team members. This series, featuring members of our ELIGs, shared personal stories and motivations, 
demonstrating the power of storytelling in inspiring change. During the year, Greene King also achieved a bronze Inclusive Employers 
Standard Award, and we were praised for our organisational commitment to inclusion, as well as being a strong role model both within 
the hospitality industry and beyond. 
Regular reports about what is important to our team members are made to the board ensuring consideration is given to their needs. There 
are many ways we engage with and listen to our people including forums, listening groups, face-to-face briefings, internal communications 
and Kingdom (our team member app), and a key performance indicator is our employee engagement survey. As part of our annual 
engagement plan, we carry out two listening surveys per year across the business, known as Rant and Rave, which measure amongst other 
criteria levels of engagement and business pride. The business consistently sees response levels above industry norms showing trust in our 
people to give true feedback and an acknowledgement of our commitment to take action and make improvements that support the 
development of our culture linked to longer term enhanced business performance levels.  
The board receives an insights report following each engagement survey and all leaders and managers receive detailed reports for their 
areas. These reports form the basis of action plans addressing key areas identified in the engagement surveys at group and divisional levels. 
To ensure that team members have transparency and reassurance that we listen to feedback, the business has continued to work on 

16 
providing increased opportunities for them to share their voices alongside continuing to improve internal communications channels. 
Throughout 2024 feedback from the engagement surveys demonstrated a desire for better tools for people to do their jobs, that people 
want to develop and grow careers within Greene King, and continued focus on authentic and open two-way communication across all 
levels of the business to further build on the positively evolving culture that truly aims to ‘Pour Happiness Into Lives’. As a result, the 
business took steps to implement a new human capital management system which goes live in the first half of 2025, streamlining processes 
and reducing burden. 2024 was also a year for enabling clearer career pathways and internal mobility commitments, alongside the successful 
roll-out of a ‘gamified’ digital learning provision to pub-based team members to make learning a more enjoyable and accessible experience. 
Customers. We place customers at the heart of everything we do and aim to Pour Happiness Into Lives. We regularly benchmark against 
the best in class in terms of brand positioning and customer service levels. In 2024, we were the first hospitality business to achieve a 
nationwide Best Bar None accreditation, delivering best practice in customer and team members’ safety and welfare in all of our managed 
pubs, with a 100% pass rate. Notable achievements recognised by the board include the launch of the new customer app, the development 
of our loyalty strategy and the completion of the roll-out of the new booking platform which began in 2023. 
The board is given details of relevant customer insights based on a number of inputs from customer surveys, market data and forward-
looking horizon scanning exercises and also of any significant health and safety related issues relating to our customers. The board is also 
regularly updated on customer attitudes towards the economic environment, which this year have been particularly important given the 
uncertainty with high interest rates and cost of living pressures.  
Tenants and franchisees. Greene King’s Partnerships manage our tenanted, franchised and leased pubs. We engage with our tenants 
and franchisees on a regular basis, including through meetings with our business development managers and through tenant surveys, to 
ensure that we are aware of the key issues affecting them and their business and offer support and assistance where possible. 
During 2024, Pub Partners continued with its roll out of the Hive and Nest pub franchises, each designed to give franchisees a ready to 
trade pub within a proven branded concept. In 2024, 14 sites were converted into Hive franchise pubs and 10 sites into Nest franchise 
pubs. The success of Greene King’s Pub Partners team is dependent on the success of our licensees, so supporting our licensees is 
paramount to the success of Pub Partners. We have several different agreement types in place designed to best align the interests of 
Greene King with those of its licensees and support long and successful tenures. 
Suppliers. Building strong relationships with our suppliers and developing lasting partnerships is one of the keys to our success and the 
launch of our supplier ESG engagement platform, Greene King Engage, in 2023 has been key to supporting this Greene King Engage has 
allowed us to interact with our suppliers in relation to a specific Science Based Targets initiative Deforestation Campaign to help us learn 
more about our suppliers in this area. We released a new supplier code of conduct which covers a range of basic requirements we expect 
our suppliers to meet, including that all employees in the supply chain shall be free from modern slavery, free to choose their employment 
and shall not be forced to work against their will. There shall also be no forced, bonded or involuntary prison labour or human trafficking. 
With the general economic and inflationary pressures that continued to be felt throughout the year, our purchasing teams have worked 
hard to mitigate cost increases and to source alternative products and /or suppliers where appropriate.  
We ensure our supplier payment performance as required by the Payment Practice Code is reported and throughout 2024, we continued 
to evaluate and improve our processes to pay as many suppliers as possible to agreed terms, further ensuring we maintain and build long-
term collaborative relationships with our suppliers. 
Debt holders. The group has a secured financing vehicle with bonds listed on the Irish Stock Exchange. Biannual reports on the financial 
performance of the vehicle are made available to bondholders on the group’s website and regulatory information is published via the 
Regulatory Information Service provided by the stock exchange and disseminated to bondholders via the clearing systems. An annual 
investor presentation takes place following the publication of the group’s annual report to update bondholders on the group’s performance 
and strategy, as well as giving bondholders the opportunity to submit questions for response by senior management. 
The group also receives funding from certain banks, principally in the form of term facilities and revolving credit facilities, and senior 
management engages proactively with the group’s bank lenders on an ongoing basis. 
Pension trustees. The group has two final salary pension schemes, both of which are closed to new members and future accrual. The 
company’s Director of Group Finance engages proactively, including via meetings, with each pension scheme trustee board on a range of 
matters, including triennial valuations, funding levels, journey planning as well as future investment strategy. The most recent triennial 
valuations of both schemes (in respect of valuation dates in 2021) were completed in 2022, and the next triennial valuations (in respect of 
valuation dates in 2024) commenced in 2024 and are expected to be completed in 2025. In respect of the Greene King scheme, the group 
continues to pay company contributions into an escrow account as stipulated by the recovery plan agreed with the trustees of the scheme 
following the completion of the 2021 valuation.  
Government and regulatory authorities. We engage with the government, politicians, and regulators through a range of methods 
providing insight and assistance on policies that impact the business. In particular, we have worked with the Ministry of Justice in relation 
to our support for programmes to encourage prison leavers back into the workplace and build a career in hospitality. Our Chief Executive 
Officer, Nick Mackenzie, also sits on the government’s hospitality sector council which is a group of experts representing a cross-section 
of the industry and is chaired by the Department for Business and Trade minister responsible for hospitality. The council is a collaboration 
between government and the hospitality sector and aims to co-create solutions and to support the delivery of the government’s hospitality 
strategy.  
Nick Mackenzie (CEO) also continued as Chair of the British Beer and Pub Association, the trade body which represents the voice of the 
sector. The business also continues to be a member of UKHospitality which lobbies and liaises with the government and regulatory bodies 
on matters affecting the industry. During 2024, we launched our report ‘Brewing Ambitions – The Role of Pubs in Breaking Down Barriers 
to Opportunity’ in the Houses of Parliament to demonstrate the ongoing work to champion careers for all in hospitality, including our 
apprenticeships, supported internship programme and commitment to training and hiring prison leavers. The work of these trade bodies 
and wider efforts, including from Greene King, contributed to the decision by the government last year to announce a review of the 
business rates system in England. We are in regular contact with local authorities in relation to property, licensing and health and safety 
matters, working proactively with them where appropriate. We also continue to have ongoing contact with HMRC in relation to tax 
matters. 

17 Strategic Report | Corporate Governance | Financial Statements 
Community. Greene King is proud to engage extensively with the communities it serves. Predominantly this occurs at a local level in 
ways which are relevant to each location. Examples include engagement in residents’ associations, community groups and Suffolk’s 
Chambers of Commerce. We embarked on a two-year partnership with the Eden Project Communities and its new ‘Closer Communities’ 
programme to help reduce loneliness and social isolation by providing the opportunity to come together and connect; as part of this, in 
2024 we hosted a Big Lunch in 350 of our pubs welcoming around 11,000 people. Other examples of community engagement are our 
activity with charity partners such as Macmillan Cancer Support, which reached a £20m fundraising milestone during the year and our 
grassroots sport support through our Proud to Pitch in programme. 
Landlords of leasehold properties. Whilst the majority of our pubs and restaurants are freehold properties, we do operate a number 
of leasehold sites owned by a range of landlords. Engagement with such landlords primarily concerns rent, repairs and energy data.  
Case studies 
1. 
 New brewery and distribution centre at Suffolk Business Park 
In April 2024, supported by the board and the board committee, we announced our plans to invest £40m in a new state-of-the-art brewery 
in Bury St Edmunds due to open in 2027. It will be a custom-built, modern facility which provides a long-term future commitment to British 
brewing and the production of cask ale, alongside our newer premium craft beer brands. The board noted that the project aligns with our 
strategic driver of optimising our assets and delivering on our strategy to be a modern hospitality business. The new operation will be 
located next to our new distribution centre on Suffolk Park and will improve the sustainability of our brewing operations. Per pint, water 
usage in the brewing process will be reduced by more than 50%, alongside other improvements in energy efficiency. The board noted that 
our commitment to build the new brewery also enables us to continue being a leading local employer for many years to come. 
 
We launched a new brewery consultation website where details of our plans were clearly set out. We held public consultations held via 
drop-in sessions and a live webinar which ensured that we engaged directly with our stakeholders, including the local community. Following 
feedback from our stakeholders during the consultation period, amendments were made to the planning application which facilitated 
positive changes to the scheme, including updated drainage and landscape design; changes to the building design to improve functionality 
and reduce quantities of materials used in construction; and details of how parking will be managed at the new brewery. The site layout 
has been designed to provide flexibility between the new brewery and new distribution centre. 
 
Over the last two years, Greene King has invested in a new multi-million-pound distribution centre, adjacent to the proposed site for the 
new brewery in Bury St Edmunds, as well as over £9 million in our historic Belhaven Brewery in Dunbar, as further evidence of our 
commitment to brewing in the UK. 
 
2. 
New franchise concept 
In line with our growth strategy goal, we continued to invest in our new franchise model. Our Pub Partners division launched its Hive Pubs 
franchise offer in late 2021 and opened its 50th Hive Pub in 2024. A Hive Pubs franchise agreement offers licensees a ready-to-trade pub 
with a proven branded concept, a guaranteed income and a percentage of food and drinks sales. On top of this, franchisees also get a share 
of the profits in their pub and can earn a bonus, too. This enables us to work collaboratively with our franchisees towards an aligned goal. 
We enable our franchisees to succeed with business support, training and comprehensive guides whilst giving them the freedom to run 
their pub in their way. 
 
Following the success of Hive Pubs, our Partnerships business unit unveiled its newest franchise pub concept during 2024, Nest Pubs. Hive 
Pubs will continue to expand and grow alongside Nest Pubs. In contrast to Hive Pubs, which focuses on food offerings, Nest Pubs focuses 
on wet-led establishments located on high streets and within community settings. The board noted that strategic investment into the right 
concept at each site would help to drive returns from our estate. Nest Pubs provide great value, an excellent experience, a calendar of 
entertainment and regular sport with the benefit of subscriptions to sports broadcasting, with the sporting offer being a key feature of the 
concept. We have focused on what our franchisees want and what our customers are asking for. Nest Pubs have their own unique identity, 
look and feel, and Greene King supports the refurbishment of each new Nest Pub, so it can deliver the franchise concept fully. 
 
Across the Greene King estate we have seen an increased demand from our customers for plant-based options. The primary food offering 
in Nest Pubs is pizza and whilst still keeping the delivery and service of food simple and efficient, without the need for dedicated kitchen 
staff, Pub Partners expanded this in 2024 with a collaboration with Pieminister, including plant-based options. With the support of the 
board, Pub Partners opened 14 Hive Pubs and 10 Nest Pubs in 2024. 
 

18 
PRINCIPAL RISKS AND UNCERTAINTIES 
Risk management is critical to the safe and successful delivery of our operations and our strategic goals. The following statement in our 
Risk Policy makes it clear to all employees the importance of risk management. 
 
Greene King recognises that the effective management of risk is critical to achieving its future strategy and current business objectives. 
Every part of the business has defined deliverables and is required to review their risk environment to: 
 
• 
identify risks to the achievement of those deliverables  
• 
assess the impact and likelihood of the risks materialising  
• 
implement effective actions designed to: 
o 
facilitate safe, economic, effective and efficient operations  
o 
achieve defined deliverables  
o 
safeguard company assets from loss, inappropriate use or fraud  
o 
enable compliance with Greene King’s internal controls 
o 
remain within the stated risk appetite 
• 
take appropriate risk to realise opportunities 
 
Greene King also requires every part of the business to monitor, communicate and report changes in the risk environment and the 
effectiveness of actions taken to manage identified risks on an ongoing basis. Clear accountability for risk ownership and risk treatment 
actions is expected at all levels. 
How we manage our risks 
Greene King follows a standard methodology used in risk management based on ISO31000. The evaluation of risks considers impact and 
likelihood of the risk materialising. In 2023 we implemented an enhanced approach to risk management and over the course of the last 
two years we have seen both the approach, and the management of risks evolve and change in line with the needs of the business and the 
wider threat and opportunity landscape. Our group risks are a combination of operational and strategic risks that support delivery of our 
goals. The group risks are reviewed quarterly by the executive board providing improved collective oversight of the group’s principal risks. 
The addition of group risks has also enabled better line of sight to divisional and functional risks. The risk framework provides a more 
joined up conversation on how risks are being managed, enabling us to take more risk where appropriate whilst ensuring threats are 
understood and appropriately managed. 
Each divisional executive team and each functional head is responsible for identifying and mitigating risks within their sphere of responsibility. 
They are then responsible for evaluating current controls in place to manage their risks, drawing up plans to improve controls and manage 
new or emerging risks. All risks are aligned and evaluated against the group’s stated risk tolerance parameters, with mitigating actions 
designed to bring all risks within these limits.  
To ensure uniformity across the organisation together with continuous improvement of our risk profile and suitable governance, a 
structured enterprise risk management framework is followed, and compliance monitored. Through this process, progress of risk 
implementation plans is monitored by senior management on a regular basis.  
In 2024 we commissioned the design, development and implementation of an in-house risk management application which will further 
enhance the effectiveness and insights to support the management of risk and assurance activities across the three lines of defence. Risk 
mitigation plans and management of risk are reviewed formally at the Risk Committee where all divisional and functional risks are presented 
and reviewed throughout the year via a rolling programme.  
Figure 1 – Risk Framework 
 

19 Strategic Report | Corporate Governance | Financial Statements 
 
Risk Oversight 
The Chief Executive Officer has overall accountability to the board for the oversight and management of risk at Greene King. However, 
the risk policy makes it clear that it is everybody’s responsibility to manage risk. The below governance framework is in place to support 
line of sight and ensure risks and risk mitigations are systematically reviewed. 
Figure 2 – Risk oversight 
 
Emerging Risks 
In our interconnected, changing world, it is getting harder to predict the future in time to make decisions and act early enough to deal with 
unexpected, disruptive events. We regularly review our risk profile to monitor the impact of external events. We also look to external 
expertise for insights on societal change and emerging risks that may impact our business and industry. 
In February 2024, the executive board and some members of our senior leadership group undertook a horizon-scanning exercise to 
consider the effect on Greene King and the broader industry of two disruptive trends over the next three to five years: emerging technology 
and increasing geopolitical uncertainties. The output of the event provided us with a view of both opportunities and threats which we could 
feed into our strategic planning process. This is the second such event we have completed in the last two years covering five topics in total. 
How we decide how much risk to take 
We use company-wide risk appetite statements split into four levels: Averse, Cautious, Balanced and Open to outline how much risk the 
executive board is willing to take to achieve its strategic goals: 
• 
Environment and Social – Balanced 
• 
Safety – Cautious 
• 
Finance – Balanced 
• 
Legal – Cautious 
• 
Reputation/Brand – Balanced 
• 
Growth and Reach – Open 
• 
Group (Principal) Risks - Open 
A clearly defined set of group risks aligned to our strategic priorities helps us focus on the risks that matter the most. Our group level 
risks are defined as ones that meet one or more of the set criteria, including: the potential impact to whole/multiple areas of the business; 
severe impact on the delivery of strategy; requires cross-division/function control; or requires executive board team visibility and support. 
In addition to the risks fully disclosed below the executive board also consider risks to information security and legal matters both of which 
have their own governance forums through which residual and emerging risks are discussed. 
Risks by strategic priority 
Strategic Driver – People; investing in our people 
Recruitment and 
Retention 
 
 
We are unable to attract and retain talent across all divisions to enable excellent customer service and achieve 
our ambition to be the pride of British hospitality through delivery of the transformation programme resulting 
in poor growth and declining reputation. 
Some of the actions we’re taking 
We are undertaking a full review of pub team roles and responsibilities, to understand key issues. There is also 
a review of working practices to understand where automation could reduce reliance on team hours and 
improve processes. This is to enable pub teams to spend more time on customer-facing activity and will include 
multi-skilling potential and ways to reduce team segmentation and inability to provide cover.  
We have reviewed our remuneration packages to ensure we remain competitive and attractive while introducing 
clearer development and progression pathways. 
We are also looking at how we can deliver less complex food offers where appropriate while reviewing the 

20 
skills and capability needed to support our strategic intent. 
As part of our cultural transformation programme, we are improving our HR systems (technology). 
We continue to drive our inclusion and diversity programme through our employee led inclusion groups and 
targeted training on inclusive leadership rolled out across the organisation. 
We continued our focus on improving leadership skills at all levels through our Unleashed programme of 
training. 
We are improving our induction training to ensure our new team members have the skills required to operate 
effectively. 
 
 
Strategic Driver – Brands; grow through compelling profitable brands 
Strong, Relevant 
Brand Portfolio 
 
Our brands and portfolio fail to resonate with consumers resulting in weak to no growth and declining footfall 
and revenue. 
Some of the actions we’re taking 
We continue to trial new concepts, as we look to learn from bringing new and different experiences to our 
customers. We completed a piece of work looking at ‘the future of socialising’ with the outputs feeding into our 
strategic planning process for 2025 and beyond. 
We continue to gain market insights and test assumptions to ensure that our brand strategy remains relevant. 
We reviewed and revised our structures and processes to manage the planning and development of our brand 
portfolio including the governance, understanding and managing capacity when adding new brands. 
We have established a clear portfolio strategy and brand investment programme and embedded these into both 
the divisional and group strategic five-year plans. 
We continue to identify and assess risks to current brands to better manage transition and we ensure that our 
divisions work closely with the property teams. 
 
 
NEW - Excellent 
Customer Service 
There is a risk that we do not deliver the level of service our customers expect consistently across our portfolio 
due to poor strategy/investment, poor operational execution, a failure to safeguard either our customers or 
our team members resulting in poor reputation scores and loss of market share. 
Some of the actions we’re taking 
Review of our customer facing deployment model. 
Revision of and development of new training modules to support front of house team members. 
Pub Leadership team brand specific training along with enhanced induction training. 
New measurement tool of Delight Score created and launched, to give a much broader understanding of 
experience being delivered in pubs.  
We have a host of additional actions in the pipeline for 2025 including building a new multi-year Service 
Excellence programme, with initial actions in FY25 including looking at in pub complaint handling and customer 
journeys, guest relations transformation, customer promise rollouts to name a few. 
Working across departments to ensure the delivery of customer experience and customer orientation is 
increasingly considered in key decisions.  
Continuing to track and report at senior level our review ratings in comparison to competitors, to track both 
our own progress but also this relative to competitors.  
We expect the work we are focusing on to act as a springboard to realise the opportunities associated with the 
risk. 
 
 
Food Strategy 
Delivery 
There is a risk that, without a suitable, sustainable and deliverable group wide food strategy, the business will 
not optimise sales or cost synergies, which will erode both market share and margins.  
Some of the actions we’re taking 
We continue to inform our food strategy and menus with inputs from customer insights and ESG and with a 
commercial lens. We continue to improve menu creation looking to reduce salt and sugar and improve our 
inclusive menu-based offering. Our procurement team takes a long-term view on our supply chain and has 

21 Strategic Report | Corporate Governance | Financial Statements 
actively looked at more sustainable options to support our environmental and carbon reduction commitments. 
This work is helping us to gain a better understanding of our current carbon footprint on menus and support 
our future strategy to reduce carbon (food origin, livestock management e.g. feed and transport).  
We are aligning our menu transformation strategy and long-term timelines to our brand strategy and ESG 
targets, which includes the impact on kitchen teams e.g. training. 
We looked at the fundamental set up of food across the business through a ‘food optimisation journey’. This 
picks up improving food operations (planning through to execution), menu development process effectiveness 
and efficiency and health and wellness ranging and delivery. The ‘food optimisation journey’ work, along with 
our wider support office restructure, has enabled us to re-align roles and responsibilities to improve and 
streamline our ways of working. 
 
 
Strategic Driver – Environmental and Social; supporting our communities giving people better lives and reduce our 
environmental impact 
Embedding & 
Integrating ESG 
strategies 
 
There is a risk that we are unable to drive the opportunities presented through ESG and/or fail to embed 
adequate controls to manage legal/regulatory requirements leading to lost benefits, potential fines and 
reputational damage. 
Some of the actions we’re taking 
We have set up our ESG governance structure, including clear accountabilities, terms of reference, meeting 
cadence and line of sight. Our Sustainability Steer Co, chaired by the Chief Experience Officer consists of 
executive board members and relevant SMEs to provide oversight of the ESG programme. 
We have Sustainability programme groups and will form a Sustainability Committee who have developed 
strategies and roadmaps to aid our transition in all key areas.  
We have agreed and published our near-term science-based targets and submitted our net-zero targets for 
review by the SBTi. 
We have developed our social strategy and have five-year strategic plans to deliver on it. 
We have developed our Climate-Related Financial Disclosures (CFD) reporting process including risk analysis 
and data capture. 
We have implemented Greene King Engage, our ESG supplier engagement platform which will enable us to 
support suppliers with knowledge building on ESG matters, understand supplier targets, collect data, collaborate 
on and track joint projects and run topic specific campaigns. To date 427 suppliers have contributed to the 
Greene King Engage platform. We are working with our suppliers to introduce carbon foot printing within our 
procurement activities. 
 
 
Strategic Driver – Operational Excellence; managing cost inflation and building sustainable processes 
Financial Health 
 
There is a risk that we are unable to control cash availability or maintain growth and investment to plan due to 
external economic factors causing financial stress within Greene King and loss of confidence of our stakeholders. 
Some of the actions we’re taking 
We have continued to maintain prudent levels of headroom against our borrowing facilities. We undertake cash 
flow forecasting on a short, medium and long-term basis to ensure that any potential liquidity shortfalls can be 
identified and mitigated via the sourcing of additional funding and/or the reassessment of discretionary spend. 
Financial covenant forecasts continue to be reviewed by the Chief Financial Officer on an ongoing basis, and our 
long-term strategic plans are formulated to ensure that financial covenant headroom is maintained at a prudent 
level. 
Our annual financial planning cycle incorporates modelling of external economic factors (including scenario 
analysis and stress testing where appropriate), facilitating regular appraisals of the potential impact of changes in 
the economic environment. 
We continue to assess our exposure to key economic variables on an ongoing basis and undertake hedging 
activity in respect of energy price risk, interest rate risk and foreign exchange risk where necessary to keep 
exposure levels within our risk appetite.  
Our Operational Excellence function drives productivity and efficiency within the business, contributing to the 
mitigation of inflationary cost increases and hence improving cashflow. 
As the business moves from a ‘build’ to ‘run’ phase, and in line with an assessment of the market conditions we 
reviewed the overhead structure of the business and support functions with the aim of improving efficiencies, 
enabling more agile working, reducing overheads, and aligning the business to the next stage of our journey. 

22 
This work focuses on non-pub areas, delivered significant change in the second half of 2024 and will complete 
by mid-2025. 
 
 
Growing Retail 
Sales 
 
There is a risk that we are unable to leverage opportunity to drive sales volumes in on trade and off 
trade and fail to optimise production to sale of own brewed volumes (OBV). 
Some of the actions we’re taking 
We are planning to improve our data analysis to better inform product placement and volumes with a CRM 
system going live in 2026. 
We have developed a strategy and implemented a plan targeting increased free-trade sales in under-utilised 
regions. 
We have invested in pins (a small beer cask containing 4.5 gallons) to enable smaller volume customers to stock 
cask and maintain quality and have invested in cellar management training. 
We are working proactively to develop reciprocal agreements with wholesale partners to grow our reach and 
sales with specific focus on premium beers whilst also putting in place ‘pull’ (indirect sales teams) for both these 
brands and Estrella Galicia. 
Building on the introduction of two premium beers in 2023 we have expanded the range bringing in two further 
premium beers in 2024. 
Our new premium beers have had successful launches and continue to perform well in the market. We continue 
to focus on growing sales in premium outlets. 
In the off trade, we have continued to deliver sales share growth ahead of any other major brewer. This has 
been delivered through a combination of competitive pricing, excellent NPD, effective shopper marketing and 
strong customer relationships. Significant new cost impacts including the implementation of EPR (extended 
producer responsibility) and reforms to PRN (packaging recovery note) as well as ongoing COGS (cost of goods 
sold) inflation will require careful management throughout 2025. 
 
 
Strategic Driver – Digital; turbocharge the digital experience for our guests and teams 
Digital 
Enablement
 
There is a risk that we are unable to fully leverage the opportunities provided through digital technology both 
to release capacity internally and to provide an excellent customer interface resulting in no increase in footfall 
or sales and no efficiency savings. 
Some of the actions we’re taking 
A clear 2025 digital technology roadmap has been agreed covering all digital products, which will be tracked 
through a new monthly digital governance framework. The annual operating plan (AOP) supports the delivery 
of key build projects such as the loyalty project. 
A new digital technology team is in place to support the development of technology requirements linked to the 
new governance framework and 2025 roadmap. We have established a central Digital Technology function and 
new ways of working to develop our internal capability to continuously manage products through their lifecycle 
and maintain digital capability; to include vendor management, product management/roadmaps, internal capability 
and product development processes.  
We are investing in our Digital Product teams and setting up continuous improvement processes to drive the 
new platforms and continually enhance the customer experience. There are continuous improvement processes 
in place for websites, bookings, app and customer engagement programme linked to the monthly governance 
meeting. 
In the new COO structure, we have clear ownership to transfer digital change into operations to leverage the 
opportunities our new improved digital infrastructure provides, particularly bookings and app pub level usage 
and engagement. Additionally, app usage is now part one of our Dartboard metrics. 
The marketing structure has changed to enable end-to-end planning and management of campaigns to leverage 
digital technologies by divisional marketing teams. Monthly and quarterly performance tracking is in place to 
assess performance verses agreed KPIs for each digital product and projects. Divisional marketing teams will 
ensure their planning reflects required activity levels to achieve digital targets.  
Customer experience tracking is also in place to assess the usability and performance of our digital products 
and feed into our continuous improvement processes. 
 
 

23 Strategic Report | Corporate Governance | Financial Statements 
Information 
Security 
There is a risk that we do not adequately protect and govern our information assets resulting in ineffective and 
inefficient use of data assets and/or data loss or breach. 
Some of the actions we’re taking 
We have a mature approach to information security using the National Institute of Standards and Technology 
(NIST) framework. We have an IT Security Manager and our cyber security controls are based on established 
security. We provide mandatory training for all staff and carry out routine monitoring of security controls 
including external pen testing and regular reporting through the security forum. 
Key controls include: firewalls in place between internet users and data servers and access controlled by industry 
leading Zero Trust infrastructure; an external security operation centre monitoring and alerting on security 
events 24/7 – preparatory work was undertaken in 2024 to allow migration to Extended Detection Response 
(XDR) in FY25; state-of-the-art enterprise detection and response on all devices; proactive vulnerability 
monitoring and patching; and regular external penetration testing. We also review third party suppliers to ensure 
all critical suppliers have the relevant levels of security controls. We have cyber insurance to mitigate the risk 
of a cyber event which includes forensic and specialist advice, should we need it. 
We have invested and improved our records management maturity, setting clear criteria and requirements for 
data classification, retention and deletion. We have also put in place a data governance framework and training 
for key personnel. 
We have continued to invest in technology with the rollout of SharePoint and the transition of data, access 
control and deletion after retention period. 
We have improved our management of customer data by moving legacy databases and legacy spreadsheets to a 
central platform / data lake with privacy by design supporting implementation of our integrated CRM tool. 
 
 
Strategic Driver – Assets; unlock value by making the most of our assets 
Maintaining 
Asset Value 
There is a risk that we fail to invest appropriately in our property assets both in terms of use and prioritisation 
of funds, resulting in poor customer experience and depreciating value. 
Some of the actions we’re taking 
We have reviewed and improved our process for assessing asset investment/acquisition including criteria and 
weighting on areas such as: environmental, accessibility, segmentation fit, and return on investment. This includes 
long-term future proofing where practically possible in terms of ESG, the Equality Act 2010 and awareness of 
any matters that could impact value in the future.  
We are moving some of our maintenance processes from reactive to proactive and improving our value 
assessment for repairs and maintenance. This includes improved forward planning with divisions to support 
reduced reactive maintenance. 
We are also supporting our pub teams through training on preventative cleaning and optimising our maintenance 
team through pooling of non-urgent jobs. 
We are improving our response to critical repairs by the introducing a triage process to reduce misuse of 24hr 
critical repair requests and therefore ensure prioritisation and better service levels for the most critical requests. 
We are also implementing Internet of Things to connect our most important pieces of equipment direct to the 
specialist repair teams. 
 
 
Sustainable & 
Safe Brewing 
 
Loss or catastrophic failure of either a critical piece of equipment or asset, resulting in serious injury or the 
inability to produce either beer or package goods. 
Some of the actions we’re taking 
We have continued to invest significantly in both the Dunbar and Bury St Edmunds breweries replacing ageing 
equipment and improving both our operational processes and ensuring the safety of all our operational teams 
is maintained. 
We have completed the transition to our new distribution centre in Bury St Edmunds which opened in 
September 2024 and have recently received planning approval for the development of a new state-of-the-art 
brewery next to our new distribution centre. The new brewery is planned to be operational in 2027. 
We continue to focus on maintaining safety, environmental and quality standards through our dedicated internal 
teams, significant site and equipment inspections and control testing. We also use third parties to provide 
independent advice and assurance including external certification to standards: ISO14001 and BRC. 
We continue to test our incident response and product recall processes to ensure that, in the case of an incident, 
we can respond as quickly and effectively as possible. 

24 
Strategic Driver – Expand; through innovation and targeted acquisition 
Delivering & 
Sustaining 
Change 
 
There is a risk that the execution of our change portfolio is ineffective and fails to deliver the strategic outcomes 
required resulting in low growth and poor customer satisfaction. 
Some of the actions we’re taking 
We have developed our transformation strategy including clear drivers and outcomes as well as clear benefits 
which can be cascaded. We have crucially engaged the senior leadership group to provide visibility and 
understanding of our transformation journey and how they are able to support. We have mobilised our 
leadership talent in the management of change to ensure change lands effectively. 
We have set up transformation programme governance including investing in experienced programme and 
change managers to build capability. This includes the development of clear roadmaps linked to strategic plans 
and divisional/functional plans and the development of our Annual Operating Plan (AOP) with clear priorities 
aligned to the change portfolio.  
To support implementation of our transformation programme deliverables into managed operations and to 
ensure business readiness we have invested in a new centre of operational excellence comprising of two distinct 
functions (central operations & efficiency and innovation). 
These functions will continue the great progress made within our operational teams to lead and land change 
effectively. We now have a robust and trusted change process starting with the through to in-pub delivery, this 
ensures we plan (through air traffic control (ATC) and communications), we do (through engaged operational 
teams), and we review (through support and compliance) all leading to better change adoption/sustainability. 
In 2024 we saw operational compliance increase by c.30% and we expect this to further increase in 2025 and 
beyond. 
 
 
NEW - 
Identification 
& adoption of 
emerging 
technology & 
AI 
There is a risk that we fail to identify and realise the opportunities of emerging technologies, digitisation and 
specifically Artificial Intelligence, leading to increased costs compared to our competitors, poorer service 
provision, reduced customer satisfaction, reduced revenues and a loss of market share. 
Some of the actions we’re taking 
We have identified and prioritised four AI implementation use cases based on a ‘high impact, low effort’ 
categorisation, which we expect to realise the benefits of in 2025. In addition, we are reviewing the use cases 
for technology within our brands and have put in place policies, guidance and governance to support the 
successful integration of new technologies and AI into our business using industry standards and considering EU 
legislation in absence of a specific national law regulating AI. Additional funding has been ringfenced in 2025 to 
accelerate and prioritise more use cases. 
Work in 2025 will focus on ensuring our data architecture is positioned to best take advantage of AI. While we 
recognise that the use of AI creates opportunities, we are also taking steps to guide our employees, and example 
of this is our ‘use case framework’ which sets out how and when to use AI.  
 
 
Strategic Driver – Culture; transform our culture 
Industry 
Perception 
 
There is a risk that we fail to change the negative perception of hospitality as a work or socialising choice 
resulting in continued difficulties in recruitment, retention and impacting customer experience and repeat 
business. 
Some of the actions we’re taking 
We believe that hospitality is a great career choice but also understand the current negative perception of 
hospitality among some of the general public. We need to understand what drives that perception. To that 
end, we have undertaken a number of surveys through experienced third parties to gain better insight. This 
information along with other activities will help us to tackle some of the causes and feeds into: 
• 
Our Inclusion and Diversity strategy, inclusive leadership training, employee led inclusion groups and 
targeted campaigns. 
• 
The development of ‘our team segmentation’ profiles to better inform our understanding of motivators, 
attitudes to work, employers etc which further enhance our approach. 
• 
Marketing of Greene King careers and communication of Greene King opportunities including our wide 
range of apprenticeship programmes. 
• 
Promoting the Greene King employer brand through PR and corporate social media.  
• 
Enhancing our social strategy work – engaging pub teams, supporting local charity fundraising as well as 
our national charity partner, Macmillan Cancer Support. 

25 Strategic Report | Corporate Governance | Financial Statements 
• 
Working with our industry trade bodies, the British Beer and Pub Association (BBPA) and UKHospitality, 
to promote the sector. 
We have completed a piece of work looking at ‘the future of socialising’ with the outputs feeding into our 
strategic planning process. 
 
 
Legal 
and 
Regulatory 
Compliance 
There is a risk that we fail to adequately comply with regulation or legislation due to lack of early identification 
or appropriate implementation and monitoring of compliance controls resulting in fines, litigation and 
reputational damage. 
Some of the actions we’re taking 
We have completed a high-level review of current legal/regulatory requirements, controls in place 
accountabilities/responsibilities and current compliance checks and reporting.        
We have developed a RACI (Responsible, Accountable, Consulted, and Informed) for each regulatory area 
including setting relevant criteria which is issued to all accountable owners including: identification of emerging 
requirements; policy development; control criteria and compliance monitoring criteria. 
We are introducing an annual internal control self-assessment process to include all relevant legal and 
regulatory requirements. We regularly horizon scan for changes in the regulatory environment including 
proposed regulation/white papers. We also require each policy owner to identify their approach to horizon 
scanning for changes within their area of policy. 
We have a Regulatory Governance Forum to oversee significant current and future regulatory and legal 
requirements, risk analysis and lobbying. 
We have developed a regulatory matrix to support risk analysis and prioritisation which is integrated as part 
of our regulatory and legal compliance activity and supports decisions on future activity. 
 
 
 
Increased 
Decreased 
   No change 
 
 
 
 
 
 

26 
ENVIRONMENTAL, SOCIAL AND GOVERNANCE  
At Greene King we recognise that we have a responsibility beyond legal and regulatory requirements and are committed to leaving a lasting 
and positive impact on communities, the environment, and people, now and for generations to come. We are guided by our environmental 
and social strategy and recognise the urgent need to address the challenges of climate change, resource depletion, and social inequality. 
Our Strategy 
 
Greene King’s purpose is to pour happiness into lives and our sustainability programme, Greene King for Good, is key to delivering that 
purpose. We aim to be known for having a sustainable and high profile social and environmental purpose at our heart, for being an inclusive 
employer, and for being respected by stakeholders for putting customers, communities, colleagues and climate at the heart of what we do. 
 Our Commitments   
Environment 
Social 
Reduce absolute scope 1 and 2 GHG (greenhouse gas) 
emissions 50% by 2030 from a 2019 base year  
Raise £18m for charity by 2025 from 2012 
Reduce absolute scope 3 GHG emissions 50% by 2030 from 
a 2019 base year 
Support 20,000 apprentices by 2025 
Reduce food waste by 50% by 2030 from a 2019 base year 
Recruit 400 prison leavers by 2025 
Reach carbon net-zero year by 2040 
Support 100 people with Special Educational Needs (SEN) and 
an Education and Health Care Plan (EHCP) through our 
Supported Internship Programme 
 
Increase Black, Asian and minority ethnic representation in the 
business by 10% by 2030, including leadership from 6% to 12%, 
senior managers from 3% to 10% and managers from 4% to 
10% by 2030 
Review of 2024 
In 2024 we made progress in embedding our sustainability programme, moving further into the delivery phase of our strategy. We further 
developed our detailed roadmap to net-zero and enacted our scope 3 supplier strategy. We also developed our longer-term community 
strategy and enhanced our governance processes. During the year, we released our new sustainability policy and deforestation statement; 
completed a social impact review; achieved the milestone of £20 million raised for our corporate partner Macmillan Cancer Support; 427 
of our suppliers joined our supplier engagement platform, Greene King Engage; and we launched our first bottle re-use programme.   
While good progress was made on environmental targets, we recognise that we, along with the rest of our industry, have much more to 
do. Delivery of our long-term commitments will continue to require significant changes to our supply chain and some change in customer 
behaviour. 

27 Strategic Report | Corporate Governance | Financial Statements 
2024 highlights 
 
 
Governance  
Our governance aim is to:  
• 
increase clarity, transparency and responsibility.  
We evolved our governance structure for ESG during 2024 and closed the year with a new Sustainability Steer Co, chaired by our 
Chief Experience Officer. We launched a new Sustainability Committee to replace our separate Environment and Social leadership 
teams and reflect a more joined up approach to Environment and Social matters. 
The Sustainability Steer Co duties include: 
• 
Overseeing the development of the group’s Environmental, Social and Governance strategy. This is managed top down, 
considering the group as a whole. 
• 
Identifying and approving both short-term and long-term Environmental, Social and Governance objectives and KPIs required to 
deliver the strategy, as well as reviewing progress against these objectives at committee meetings. 
• 
Reviewing our sustainability risk profile bi-annually to ensure that the risks to achieving the objectives are being appropriately 
managed. 
• 
Overseeing the activities of the sustainability workstreams and acting as an escalation point for relevant cross functional working. 
• 
Monitoring external developments in respect of Environmental, Social and Governance issues and considering any implications 
for the group. 
• 
Reviewing and approving the group’s policies and practices in relation to Environmental, Social and Governance matters to 
ensure they remain effective, compliant with legal and regulatory requirements and industry standards and recommending these 
to the executive board for approval. 
• 
Reviewing and approving all Environmental, Social and Governance content to be published in the annual report. 
• 
Making any recommendation to the executive board on any area within its remit. 
Sustainability Steer Co.  
The Sustainability Steer Co is chaired by our Chief Experience Officer, the members include: 
• 
Chief Experience Officer (1) 
• 
Chief Financial Officer (1) 
• 
Director of Sustainability (2) 
• 
Group Risk Assurance Director (2) 
• 
Procurement Director (2) 
• 
Efficiency and Innovation Director (2) 
• 
Property Services Director (2) 
• 
Insights Director (2) 
• 
People & Culture Director (2) 
• 
Legal Director (2) 
• 
Sustainability Leadership Team Members 
 
1. Member of Greene King executive board 
2. Member of Greene King leadership group 
 
The Sustainability Steer Co meets on a quarterly basis (as a minimum) to be informed of new initiatives, give guidance and approval, and 
discuss the progress made against our targets and commitments. This group reflects the material areas of focus in Greene King’s 
sustainability and provides leadership and focus in their areas of expertise to enable integration of sustainability within the business.  
In 2024, to support our Environment and Social lead positions we added a Governance led role to our Sustainability team to increase the 
focus and attention to our sustainability governance programme.  
In 2024 we released a new Sustainability policy, supporting our commitment to proactively assess and mitigate environmental, social, and 
governance risks to ensure long-term sustainability and resilience in our operations. The policy reflects our dedication to minimising our 
environmental footprint, promotes responsible business practices, and explains how we contribute positively to the communities in which 
we operate.  

28 
We made the decision in early 2022 to put climate science at the heart of our environment strategy. We’ve committed to setting near 
term and net-zero targets through the Science Based Targets initiative (SBTi) and reporting our progress to reducing our Greenhouse Gas 
(GHG) emissions across scopes 1, 2 and 3 through our annual report (page 26). Our near-term targets to reduce GHG emissions across 
scopes 1, 2 and 3 by 50% by 2030 were approved by SBTi in February 2023. We have publicly stated our intention to reach carbon net-
zero by 2040. In 2024 we completed the rebasing of our net-zero target for Forest, Land and Agriculture as required by SBTi and submitted 
this for approval in January 2025. Alongside this we remain committed to reducing our food waste in line with the Courtauld Agreement 
by 50% by 2030. In addition to committing to these targets and reporting against them, we also report ESG data via our parent company 
CK Asset Holdings Limited (listed on the Main Board of the Hong Kong Stock Exchange).  
Environment 
Our environmental strategy has two core aims: 
• 
to offer sustainable solutions to our customers; and, 
• 
improve our own operations and value chain through net-zero targets. 
With a near-term science-based target and a long-term public commitment to our net-zero target, we are acting to drive our carbon 
footprint down, including the procurement of renewable electricity, introducing energy efficiency measures and solutions, working with 
our suppliers on their emission hotspots, introducing new and innovative circular business solutions. 
Property Decarbonisation 
In 2024 we made significant capital investments into decarbonising our properties, with £3m invested in the following areas: 
• 
We installed voltage optimisation equipment to 477 sites in 2024, which is estimated to save approximately 1.27 gigawatt-hours 
of electricity on an annual basis. 
• 
We installed heat pumps in two sites to continue to improve our understanding of the effectiveness of the technology. In the 
sites where we currently have heat pumps there has been no negative impact on customer experience. 
• 
40 sites have had investment in kitchens to make them ‘electric-ready’ in line with our net-zero ambitions. 18 of these sites have 
made the full switch to electric only kitchen equipment. 
We invited our property suppliers to complete our sustainability questionnaire using our dedicated supplier sustainability platform: Greene 
King Engage and were pleased that 195 (88%) completed it. This information allows us to assess their respective maturities in developing 
sustainability strategies and will inform how we develop our supplier sustainability programme for property suppliers.  
Renewable Energy & Infrastructure 
The Guarantees of Origin (GoO) purchased in 2023 allow us to report 100% renewable electricity in 2024. In 2024, we also joined the 
RE100 and continued to explore innovative technology for the use of renewable energy sources. We continue to trial solar panels as a 
solution for our buildings.  
Sustainable Procurement 
In 2024 we sought deeper engagement with our largest food and drink suppliers, working with them to improve sustainability data and to 
develop joint strategies for emissions reduction. We aim to establish long term, collaborative relationships on sustainability with our key 
supply partners.  
Following the launch of Greene King Engage, our supplier sustainability platform, in 2023, we asked property and Goods Not For Resale 
(GNFR) suppliers to complete the sustainability questionnaire to understand the maturity of their approaches to sustainability in 2024. In 
total across our food, drink, property, goods not for resale and IT suppliers, 427 of the included 490 suppliers completed the questionnaire. 
Additionally, we used our Greene King Engage platform to engage our food supply chains on the availability of information on the traceability 
and origins of any high-risk deforestation commodities, to support our commitment to zero deforestation. 
 
In 2023 we made the following ambitious commitments as part of our responsible sourcing strategy. While we did not meet these goals in 
2024, we made progress against them and they remain a focus of our responsible procurement strategy. 
 
• 
Zero Air freighted products or ingredients  
During 2023 we introduced a new policy that no new air freighted fruit and vegetables would be allowed into our business by 
March 2024 extending to zero air freighted products or ingredients by September 2024. A review of all products was completed, 
and a due diligence process was put in place to make the appropriate changes within our strategy.  
 
• 
Palm Oil 
Greene King committed to obtaining the relevant certification for all palm oil used in our supply chain by the end of September 
2024, with all products containing palm oil to be certified by the Roundtable on Sustainable Palm Oil (RSPO). A review of all 
products was completed and all of our primary oil purchased is confirmed as RSPO Certified. We identified a small number of 
tier two suppliers that will be changed across 2025. 
 
• 
Free range eggs  
Greene King has purchased 100% free range shell eggs since 2019. We achieved our goal to be 100% free range for all liquid egg 
purchased in March 2025. 
Reducing the environmental impacts of brewing 
In May 2024 we announced our plans for a new, purpose-built brewing facility on the outskirts of Bury St Edmunds and in January 2025 we 
were given planning approval. At the new facility, we hope to reduce the amount of water required to brew each pint of beer by up to 
50% when compared to our current Westgate brewery. The new brewery will also be designed to be more efficient for electricity usage. 
We also carried out the first product level carbon footprints of two of our beers in 2024. The outputs of this exercise will be valuable in 
assessing the different carbon emission contributions through the product lifecycle from growing barley and hops through to the finished 

29 Strategic Report | Corporate Governance | Financial Statements 
product being ready to sell to our customers.  
Food waste 
In 2024, we established a method for measuring food waste at a site level. We expanded the trial of the artificial intelligence (AI) solution 
to more accurately measure food waste in five sites for a period of six months. Our internal food waste working group also identified a 
number of action areas to be tested in 2025 from the storage of ingredients to preparation of food and the design of dishes. 
We measure our overall food waste in terms of kg waste / 100 covers, to normalise against any changes in trade. We finished 2024 -5% 
against our 2019 baseline but saw no material shift from our 2023 result. During 2025 we aim to integrate Hickory’s into our reported 
figure as we improve our data collection methods. 
We have established partners across our food journey to divert excess food from being wasted. At depot we are partnered with foodbanks 
including City Harvest, Bread & Butter Thing and Felix Project. During 2024, £431,684 worth of food, equating to 97,157kg, was donated 
directly from depots. To minimise food waste in our pubs we continued our partnership with Too Good To Go (a platform that connects 
customers to unsold surplus food) in 2024, with an estimated 208,688 meals saved. During the year, this partnership passed the 700,000 
meals saved milestone. 
Packaging 
In 2024, we trialled a partnership with Again! to collect and reuse empty bottles in 19 pubs, expanding to 68 pubs by year end, collecting 
350,000 bottles. We eliminated plastic takeaway boxes and replaced 3 million single-use plastic cups with recyclable versions. We also 
began refilling plastic chemical containers, removing 25,000 single-use containers in 2024. In our food supply chains, we switched to 
returnable packaging for salad items, removing over 250,000 boxes. Through the Tub2Pub recycling scheme, we collected 26,253kg of 
sweet and chocolate containers, diverting three tonnes of plastic from landfill and repurposing it into garden furniture. 
Energy Efficiency 
In Q1 2024, we performed 36 ESOS (Energy Savings Opportunity Scheme) audits across our estate, covering our two breweries, 
warehouses and distribution centres, pubs in our higher energy using brands and hotels. Following the government’s addition to the 
legislation to submit an Energy Saving Action List, we have worked on quantifying the energy savings actions implemented in 2024 or 
planned for implementation in 2025.  
Energy usage and greenhouse gas emissions  
The table below has been produced in compliance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006 (Strategic and Directors’ Report) 
Regulations 2013. In line with the validation of our near-term Science Based Targets with the SBTi, we are committed to reporting a full 
greenhouse gas (GHG) inventory, including scope 3. Our baseline year has been set as 2019, and this has been compiled with assistance 
from the Carbon Trust, using the GHG protocol standards. Due to mandatory reporting guidelines, we have quoted scope 2 emissions 
using both the location-based and market-based approach; Greene King opted to use the market-based approach in its near-term target 
setting. The location-based approach uses the average emissions from power generation for the UK power grid as a whole. A market-
based approach uses emissions data from the specific electricity tariff used in operations, or if not available, the emissions from the residual 
UK grid average after removing renewable electricity sources that have been claimed by retail consumers. 
Scope 1 relates to the direct emissions from the fuels we use in our breweries, pubs, restaurants, hotels and offices, such as natural gas 
and liquid petroleum gas. It also includes emissions from owned vehicles (including company cars) but excludes logistics where we outsource 
this to third parties. Refrigerant gas and F-gas emissions in respect of our breweries, pubs and restaurants are also included. Scope 2 relates 
to the indirect emissions associated with the generation of electricity consumed in our sites. We have used the UK government’s 
Greenhouse Gas (GHG) Conversion Factors for Company Reporting for all scope 1 emissions. GHG emissions from refrigeration and air 
conditioning units have been determined using the simplified material balance method as described in the Environmental Reporting 
Guidelines 2013. 
Scope 1 and scope 2 emissions (with the exception of the brewing process) are calculated using emissions factors published by the 
Department for Energy Security and Net-Zero. Brewing process emissions factors are an estimate from the Carbon Trust, who assisted 
in producing our 2019 baseline emissions. 
Scope 3 relates to all other upstream and downstream activities present in our operations, and these emissions have been estimated using 
a combination of two frameworks. Firstly, where available, verified volume data has been multiplied by a sector specific emissions factor to 
calculate the annual emissions. Secondly, where volume data is not available, spend data has been multiplied by Environmentally Extended 
Input/Output data (EEIO) factors. Efforts are being made to improve this data quality, by engaging with our supply chain to understand 
their product specific emissions factors and engaging with a third party to obtain product emissions reports. 
Energy usage 
We have improved the transparency of our energy usage by including a more detailed split of ‘other fuels’, as well as including scope 3 
distribution and travel usage. Our calculation methodologies for energy usage are as follows: 
• 
Natural gas and electricity consumption is captured via a mixture of smart meters and manual reads and collated by our third-
party energy consultant, with all of the readings available in their data system. This system allows us to report group wide 
consumption in real time. 
• 
An annual statement for propane, gas oil, and kerosene purchases is provided to us by our suppliers. This is converted from 
litres to kWh using fuel properties data published by the Department for Energy Security and Net-Zero. 
• 
Fuel usage from distribution is collated from separate sources. We capture fuel usage in our own distribution depots and are 
provided with annual usage figures from our distribution partners. All of these amounts are converted from litres to kWh using 
fuel properties data published by the Department for Energy Security and Net-Zero. 
• 
Business mileage data is collected using employee expense claims. These mileage figures are converted to kWh using estimates 
on fuel efficiency (split by fuel type and vehicle classification) and fuel properties data published by the Department for Energy 
Security and Net-Zero. 

30 
We have seen material shifts in our energy usage since our baseline year: 
• 
Our total electricity consumption has dropped a further 3.5% from 2023, due to the continued investment in energy reduction 
technology, as well as energy efficiency remaining a target on our group Dartboard. Other fuels have dropped 2.6% YoY meaning 
a drop of 4.5% since 2019. 
• 
2024 marks the first year that energy usage from business travel has fallen below our 2019 baseline. This is due to our salary 
sacrifice scheme on electric vehicles, coupled with our continuous review of the emissions intensity of vehicles offered on our 
company car scheme. Discounted EV charging is available at both our support centres in Bury St Edmunds and Burton upon 
Trent. Our energy intensity (kWh / mile travelled) has dropped 20% in the past two years. 
• 
Energy usage from distribution has dropped almost 8% YoY. 
Greenhouse gas emissions 
Our 2023 greenhouse gas emissions and 2024 location based greenhouse gas emissions have been verified by the Carbon Trust, in 
accordance with ISO14064-3. 
• 
Our scope 1 and 2 emissions movements follow the changes in energy usage. For the first time, we are now reporting zero 
emissions in our scope 2, market-based calculation, due to 100% matching of electricity consumption with renewable 
certification. This is a key milestone in our journey to net-zero by 2040. 
• 
We have made improvements in our scope 3 emissions reporting this year: 
o 
We have started to collect product specific emissions from suppliers for use in our calculations, namely in our drinks 
segment of category 1. 
o 
During the year we completed a product carbon footprint exercise on two of our beers, across four different 
packaging types. Using this data, we have extrapolated across the rest of our own beer brands, to give us a more 
accurate calculation of our brewing footprint. 
Our targets for the year ahead remain the same. We will continue to work with our biggest suppliers to help us understand the footprint 
of their specific products, and more importantly, how we can collaborate to further reduce emissions in our supply chain. 
 
Emissions Scope 
Energy Consumption (kWh)¹  
2024 
% change to 
Baseline 
2023 
Baseline Year 
2019 
Scope 1 
Natural Gas 
289,038,270
-14.0% 
281,591,986 
336,169,441
Scope 1 
Propane 
15,215,218
-0.2% 
15,287,762 
15,250,749
Scope 1 
Gas Oil (Heating Oil) 
1,033,638
-33.0% 
1,056,896 
1,543,254
Scope 1 
Kerosene 
778,103
-25.2% 
1,143,246 
1,040,668
Scope 1 
Diesel – Owned Distribution 2 
3,325,458
- 
2,742,350 
n/a*
Scope 2 
Electricity 
289,923,545
-12.6% 
300,273,318 
331,621,314
Scope 3 
Diesel – Leased Distribution 2 
18,804,645
5.7%5 
16,030,547 
20,941,892
Scope 3 
Diesel – Distribution Partners 2 
37,100,152
- 
45,453,700 
n/a*
Scope 3 
Diesel – Business Travel 3 
3,432,380
- 
4,096,355 
n/a*
Scope 3 
Petrol – Business Travel 3 
4,139,183
- 
5,320,454 
n/a*
Scope 3 
LPG – Business Travel 3 
19,194
- 
45,224 
n/a*
Scope 3 
Electric – Business Travel 3 
458,661
- 
243,480 
n/a*
Scope 3 
Unknown – Business Travel 3 
5,342,022
-1.1%6 
5,734,662 
13,546,350
 
Total 
668,610,469
-5.7% 
679,019,981 
720,113,669
 
Like for like basis 4 
631,510,316
-12.3% 
633,566,280 
720,113,669
1 Due to the timing of our reporting, our energy usage may include a small number of estimated or disputed meter reads but represents the most accurate data we have at this time. Our prior year 
comparative has been amended to reflect updating of meter reads. 
2 Based on fuel data collated from our distribution depots & distribution partners. Greene King depot usage split between scope 1 and scope 3 based on the vehicle ownership status.  
3 Based on expense claims for business mileage, and fuel card usage. Unknown vehicle types cover personal car usage.  
4 Excluding diesel usage by our distribution partners – this data is unavailable for our baseline year. 
5 Comparison to baseline is the total owned + leased distribution energy as 2019 data cannot be split. 
6 Comparison to baseline is the total business mileage energy as 2019 data cannot be split by type.   
 
Emissions (tonnes CO2e) 
Source of emissions 
2024 
% change 
to 
Baseline 
2023  
Baseline 
Year 2019 
Scope 1 
Natural gas 
52,865 
-14.5% 
51,511 
61,805 
Propane 
3,258 
-0.4% 
3,273 
3,271 
 
Gas Oil (Heating Oil) 
265 
-33.1% 
271 
396 
 
Kerosene 
192 
-25.2% 
282 
257 
 
Diesel - Owned Vehicles 
838 
- 
691 
n/a* 
Refrigerants 
4,259 
361.9% 
6,322 
922 
Brewing process 
3,163 
-24.0% 
3,199 
4,162 

31 Strategic Report | Corporate Governance | Financial Statements 
Total direct emissions scope 1 
64,840 
-8.4% 
65,549 
70,813 
Scope 2 
Electricity (location based) 
60,029 
-29.2% 
62,179 
84,762 
Gross emissions (location based) 
124,869 
-19.7% 
127,729 
155,575 
Scope 2 
Electricity (market based) 
- 
-100.0% 
115,111 
125,026 
Gross emissions (market based) 4, 5 
64,840 
-66.9% 
181,135  
195,839 
Group revenue (excluding Pub Partners) (£m) 
2,257 
 
2,192 
1,761 
Scope 1 & 2 tonnes CO2e per £m turnover (market based) 1 
28.7 
-74.2% 
82.4 
111.2 
Scope 3  
Purchased goods & services: 
 
 
 
 
  
Food 
283,498 
-15.7% 
312,643 
336,135 
Drink 
160,524 
-23.3% 
169,865 
209,360 
 
Other 
133,816 
9.4% 
140,816 
122,333 
 
Total purchased goods & services  
577,838 
-13.5% 
623,324 
667,828 
 
Fuel production & transportation 
29,177 
-1.3% 
29,530 
29,243 
 
Upstream transportation 4 
72,353 
32.4% 
79,126 
54,654 
 
Waste generated in operations 
746 
-10.2% 
1,511 
831 
 
Business travel 
7,503 
191.8% 
8,204 
2,571 
 
Employee commuting 
15,719 
-31.7% 
15,719 
23,007 
 
Upstream leased assets 
455 
n/a* 
416 
- 
 
Downstream transportation 
6,649 
46.5% 
6,538 
4,539 
 
Disposal of sold product 
320 
-93.1% 
631 
4,628 
 
Downstream leased assets 
30,448 
-29.1% 
32,848 
42,946 
Total indirect emissions scope 33, 4 
741,208 
-10.8% 
797,845 
830,247 
Total emissions (location based) 4 
866,705 
-12.2% 
925,574 
985,822 
Total emissions (market based) 4 
806,046 
-21.5% 
978,506 
1,026,086 
Group revenue (£m) 
2,451 
 
2,375 
2,184 
Total tonnes CO2e per £m turnover (market based) 2,4 
328.9 
-30.0% 
411.9 
469.8 
 
1 Using combined managed pubs and Brewing & Brands turnover. The vast majority of our scope 1 & 2 emissions are generated in these two divisions. 
2 Using total group turnover. 
3 Our total scope 3 emissions cover all categories with the exception of category 11b (indirect use phase emissions of sold products). This covers the usage of electricity to refrigerate our beers. As we 
have extremely limited data and influence here, we have chosen not to report on these emissions. If included, they would represent less than 1% of our total carbon footprint.  
4 Our 2023 comparatives have been restated to include transportation emissions (2k tonnes) which had been omitted in error. 
5 Greene King reports market-based emissions in accordance with the GHG Protocol standards and for 2024 applies the RE100 technical criteria, which reflects our purchase of renewable energy. As a 
member of RE100, our approach is informed by the RE100 quality criteria and GHG Protocol guidance. RE100 requires claims to use of renewable electricity to be based on generation occurring in the 
same market for renewable electricity that use is claimed in, this includes the single market in Europe. The revised RE guidance published in December 2022 provided an updated list of countries that make 
up the single market. 
Although the UK has been excluded from the list, the RE guidance provided grandfathering provisions for allowing for the UK to continue to be recognised within the single market in Europe and therefore 
we have applied the grandfathering provisions when calculating our market based emissions 
 
 
 
 
Water savings and waste 
 
Water 
 
 
2024 
2023 
Water saved (m3)1 
 
 
207,320 
193,409 
Average daily usage saving (m3)1 
 
 
568.0 
528.9 
Pints of water saved per day 
 
 
999,505 
930,736 
Water audits  
 
 
490 
327 
Reduction in billing (ongoing savings) 
 
 
£820,318 
£581,887 
Refunds achieved 
 
 
£201,070 
£127,383 
1 Water saved by identifying, detecting and fixing leaks  
 
 
 
 
 

32 
 
52 weeks up to 
29 December 2024 
52 weeks up to 
31 December 2023 
Recycling 
Tonnes 
% 
Tonnes 
% 
Waste diverted on site 
38,646 
68 
38,838 
68 
Waste sent to Energy from Waste (EFW) 
13,085 
23 
14,984 
26 
Waste sent to Mixed Recycling Facility (MRF) 
5,161 
9 
2,646 
5 
Waste sent to Landfill 
248 
0 
318 
1 
 
57,140 
100 
56,786 
100 
 
 
 
 
 
Social 
Our vision has a powerful social purpose at its heart. Our social aims are to: 
• 
give millions of people better lives; 
• 
provide good work and opportunities for everyone; and 
• 
lead the warmest welcome. 
 
Community  
 
Our pubs, breweries, depots, and support centres play a vital role in their communities, fostering a sense of belonging. In 2024, our pubs 
continued to be a hub for community connections through various group activities under our Closer Communities initiative, previously 
known as No One Alone. This initiative includes Closer Communities at Christmas, seeing 262 pubs offer over 2,000 Christmas meals 
to community champions. We further expanded our Closer Communities initiative in 2024 by collaborating with Eden Project 
Communities hosting a Big Lunch in 350 of our pubs welcoming around 11,000 people. 
 
In October Greene King celebrated Black History Month with a Windrush Front Room living exhibition in three Urban pubs, hosted by 
historian and author Tony Fairweather giving people the opportunity to immerse themselves in the social history of the Windrush 
Generation. This raised over £1,000 for the African Caribbean Leukaemia Trust. 
 
In 2023, we partnered with Carefree to offer free stays for carers in our hotel rooms and in 2024, this trial was extended to include 14 
hotels providing 169 room nights.  
 
Since its inception our grassroots sport community scheme, Proud To Pitch In has gone from strength to strength. The scheme provides 
grants to sports clubs and groups across Britain supporting them with up to £4,000 for equipment and the cost of running community 
sports groups. Established by our Brewing & Brands division, 10p is donated by Greene King from pints of Greene King IPA and 50p 
from 4 x 500ml can packs sold. In 2024, we distributed £349,844 in grants to 117 clubs ranging across 38 sports from boxing to wheelchair 
rugby and from Boccia to Shinty.  
 
Charity partnership with Macmillan Cancer Support  
 
In 2024, our customers and teams raised £3.9 million for Macmillan Cancer Support, our highest fundraising year to date and an increase 
of £0.1 million over 2023. For 2024 we continued to focus on the key fundraising periods of Macmillan May and ‘We Love Macmillan 
Nurses’ in September and October. 2024 fundraising showed fluctuation in line with pub sales figures so a focus on strengthening 
communications and awareness of the social impact of fundraising developed throughout the year. The team worked to reengage 
divisional reps and root the partnership in different areas of the business. In 2024 we celebrated the incredible milestone of having raised 
over £20 million for Macmillan since 2012. The achievements of this partnership were recognised with the Business Charity Awards 
award for Most Effective Long-Term Partnership. 
 
Social Mobility  
 
Brewing Ambitions Report: In 2024, Greene King continued its commitment to supporting individuals from diverse backgrounds 
through various initiatives, as outlined in our Brewing Ambitions report. 
 
Supported Internships: We partnered with Landmarks Specialist College and MENCAP to deliver supported internships, aiding 116 
young people with special educational needs or disabilities (SEND). With an 84% employment rate post-program, we plan to expand our 
reach across the UK, receiving the National Partnership Award from MENCAP for the programme. We also collaborated with Street 
League, Merton College, and Swiss Cottage College to provide industry insight days and engagement sessions. 
 
Releasing Potential: The Releasing Potential Programme aimed to employ 400 prison leavers by the end of 2025. In 2024, we celebrated 
our first completed prison apprenticeship and launched two more Prison Training Academies. We supported the New Futures Network 
hospitality campaign, engaging with over 280 prisoners during visits to 30+ prisons over a two-week period. Additionally, we co-delivered 
three sessions with Iceland to upskill over 150 prison employment leads. Our partnerships with the Scottish Prison Service and Only A 
Pavement Away charity furthered our efforts. In 2024, we recruited 58 prison leavers which took Greene King to 70% of its 2025 target. 
 
Apprenticeships: Our apprenticeship programme saw 372 completions and 931 new enrolments in 2024, with an 87% retention rate. 
We expanded our Apprentice Chef Academy and received recognition from Springboard Charity and the Department for Education. 
Since 2011, Greene King has supported over 18,000 apprentices, with a goal of 5,000 more by end 2025. 
 

33 Strategic Report | Corporate Governance | Financial Statements 
Modern Slavery  
 
In 2024 we entered the second year of our Modern Slavery action plan. Our focus was to upskill our teams and formalise our policy for 
the business. Our Modern Slavery working group has followed a strategic action plan with three priorities: policy, training and supply 
chain. During 2024, the working group:  
 
• 
Launched our Modern Slavery policy, which supports our commitment to act ethically and with integrity in all our business 
dealings and relationships and to implement and enforce effective systems and controls to ensure modern slavery does not 
exist in our business or in any of our supply chains.  
• 
Launched our training programme following a training needs assessment undertaken in the first six months of the year, 
evaluating the high / medium risk cohorts and training opportunities within the business. In partnership with the Slave Free 
Alliance, we trained our working group leaders and representatives from across the business in high-risk teams such as 
Employee Relations, Procurement, HR and Legal, to understand and identify modern slavery, providing them with the tools to 
mitigate the risks and respond to concerns about modern slavery within the organisation and supply chain. 
• 
Reviewed our value chain and identified high-risk suppliers following the launch of our supplier engagement platform, Greene 
King Engage. This included reviewing the due diligence procedures to identify and mitigate any identified risks. 
  
 
Responsible Retailing  
 
During 2024, Greene King continued its collaboration with Best Bar None, the Home Office-backed responsibility scheme for licensed 
businesses, to further develop a national accreditation scheme for multiple operators that could be expanded across the sector. Through 
our Enjoy Responsibly scheme, published on our website and available through point of sale in our pubs, we offer consumer advice on 
responsible drinking. The Enjoy Responsibly page shares government guidance, tips on responsible drinking, and the ways we are 
responsible retailers. We follow, as a minimum, the ‘Challenge 21’ or ‘Challenge 25’ schemes in our pubs, and our tills remind our team 
members behind the bar to check. Every new bar team member completes bespoke Greene King training before they can serve alcohol, 
ensuring they understand their legal responsibilities and obligations, as well as the impact of alcohol on children. We also operate the 
Ask for Angela scheme across our managed pub estate, supporting our teams with training to help customers if they find themselves in 
vulnerable situations. 
 
Allergens and gluten 
We provide full allergen information in all our pubs, restaurants and hotels, so that our customers can make informed meal choices 
according to diet and preferences; we’re proud of our non-gluten containing dish range and vegan range across all our brands. Our team 
members undertake thorough allergen training in order to support our customers. 
 
Healthy eating  
Our aim is to serve great tasting, quality food and give customers a wide range of menu options that support a healthy balanced diet. All 
our menus offer a variety of dishes alongside the calorie information to allow customers to make informed decisions. Our children’s 
menus offer a range of choices, in line with the five-a-day government recommendations. Across Hungry Horse’s children’s menus, we 
have worked alongside The Food Foundation to bring in more vegetable choices, ensuring an offer of two of your five-a-day with every 
main meal. In 2024 we also introduced our first Coeliac UK accredited gluten-free menu as part of our new HighTales pilot; and we are 
signatories of eight pledges within the Government’s Public Health Responsibility Deal.  
 
   

34 
NON-FINANCIAL AND SUSTAINABILITY INFORMATION 
STATEMENT 
 
Climate-related financial disclosures (CFD) 
 
Companies Act 2006 as amended by the Companies (Strategic Report) (Climate-related Financial Disclosure) Regulations 2022, introduced 
in January 2022, mandates that companies with more than 500 employees and more than £500m turnover report on group climate-related 
risks, how it impacts their strategy, and the KPIs and mitigation processes in place to lessen those risks. As Greene King meets these 
thresholds, we have included these disclosures below. 
 
Introduction 
 
As we enter the second year of our Climate-related Financial Disclosures (CFD) initiative, we are proud to present the progress and 
insights gained over the past year. As there were no material changes to our business across 2024, we did not repeat our risk assessment 
work this year and instead focused on progress and risk mitigation. Building on the foundational work of our initial submission, we continued 
to embed our ESG requirements into our key control processes, improving data accuracy, and integrating climate-related financial risks 
into our overall risk management framework. Our commitment to transparency and proactive risk management has driven us to refine 
our strategies.  
 
Over the past year, Greene King reached the following milestones, among others: 
• 
Achieved Sustainable Pub Company of the Year at the Publican Awards 
• 
Matched 100% of our electricity usage with renewable certification 
• 
Completed our Net Zero Transition Roadmap 
• 
Included a full GHG inventory (scopes 1, 2 & 3) in our annual report 
• 
Launched our Supplier engagement strategy to address sour scope 3 emissions 
 
Governance Overview 
 
During 2024, we evolved our governance structure to increase the scope of engagement across the business by enhancing accountability 
and ownership through our sustainability programme. We formed a new Sustainability Steer Co to streamline the decision-making 
processes and define priorities. The Sustainability Steer Co is responsible for recommending the ESG strategy and sustainability initiatives 
for approval by the executive board. See page 27 for the evolution of our Sustainability Governance structure across 2024.  
 
Risk Management 
 
In 2022, the introduction of Environment and Social (E&S) as a strategy driver was complemented by adding an ESG focused risk onto our 
group risk register. This was to highlight the importance of delivering on our E&S strategy and the downside of failing to adapt to a world 
impacted more and more frequently by climate change. As part of this headline risk, a key mitigation action was the production of a robust 
CFD risk analysis to implement into our strategic planning cycle.  
The following is the outline of the process followed in 2022. We will conduct our review of the process and identified risks again in 2025 
in line with our commitment in 2023 to conduct this process bi-annually as there were no material changes to our business structure in 
2024. 
Climate-Related Risk Identification 
In determining the most material climate-related risks and opportunities, Greene King enlisted the assistance of a sustainability consultancy, 
the Carbon Trust, to ensure that the outputs were formed using a scientific, data-led approach. This risk identification was carried out at 
group level, and the steps taken to focus in on our top climate-related risks and opportunities (CROs) were as follows: 
1. 
Interviews were conducted by the Carbon Trust and Greene King sustainability teams, with subject matter experts across the 
business. These experts were chosen across all areas of the Greene King value chain and aligned with our sustainability working 
groups. 
 
2. 
For transitional risks, the data gathered from these interviews was overlaid against our carbon footprint data to identify hotspots 
in our scope 1 & 2 emissions, and scope 3 category 1 emissions (with food & drink procurement, and property services being 
the three main categories for higher scrutiny). We have used our 2022 data for scope 1 & 2, but scope 3 data is taken from 
2019 due to 2022 data being unavailable at the time of analysis. 2021 and 2020 were not chosen due to the impact of Covid-19. 
 
3. 
Using both data sets, a long list of CROs was established, and the Carbon Trust identified those that could be quantifiably 
modelled in order to assess their materiality. The table below analyses the split of quantitative, qualitative, and unassessed CROs. 
Any unassessed CROs will be reviewed periodically to understand whether a qualitative assessment can be made. 
 

35 Strategic Report | Corporate Governance | Financial Statements 
 
 
4. 
Using financial data from Greene King, and from external climate and financial models, the potential value of these risks was 
calculated. Overlaid with our risk-scoring matrix that considers financial impact, likelihood of occurrence, and velocity at which 
a CRO might evolve, a prioritised shortlist of CROs was produced. 
 
 
5. 
This shortlist of risks was reviewed and approved by our ESG board, in 2023 (renamed Sustainability Steer Co in 2024). 
It is our view that a full CRO assessment is unnecessary each year, unless there is a material change in the Greene King business structure 
or operating model. Our aim is that the CRO assessment will be completed every two years, albeit in the interim, materiality modelling 
can be updated using internal financial data. This will highlight any key changes in the risk profile of these identified risks, and any new or 
emerging risks will be highlighted by the business and working groups.  
Management of climate-related risks, and integration into the organisation’s overall risk management  
The management of climate-related risks is consistent with the group’s risk management processes, outlined previously in the annual report 
(page 18), but we have additional controls in place to ensure that climate-related risks are embedded. 
• 
There is a group level principal risk for embedding and integrating our ESG strategies. This risk is aligned to our strategic driver 
‘Environment & Social (E&S)’. 
• 
E&S has been added as a group risk impact area, and our risk assessment matrix has thresholds defined. All group risks are 
assessed against this impact area, as well as divisional / functional risks where applicable. 
• 
A risk appetite level for E&S has been defined to give guidance to the business on making decisions that impact E&S.  
• 
We have begun to embed E&S requirements into key control processes (for example, brand development) to ensure our risk 
exposure is considered when making business decisions. 
In 2025, our focus will be to continue embedding these identified risks into divisional and functional risk registers.  
 

36 
Strategy Overview 
 
Scenario Analysis 
 
As per the climate risk identification process above (point 4), we used two specific climate scenarios to assess the financial materiality of 
the highlighted risks, compared against a separate baseline scenario. These are explained below: 
 
1) 
RCP 2.6 (Representative Concentration Pathway), which is likely to keep global temperature rise below 2°C by the year 2100. 
Described as a ‘very stringent’ emissions reduction pathway, this scenario will likely require high intervention in the form of regulation 
and potential carbon levies. We have used this scenario to estimate the potential impacts of our transitional risks. This scenario was 
chosen after consulting with our advisers as it was representative of prevailing consensus on a likely scenario at the time of 
commencing the assessment. 
2) 
RCP 8.5, generally taken as a ‘worst-case’ climate change scenario, with global temperature rise exceeding 3°C by the year 2100. We 
have used this scenario to estimate potential impacts of our physical risks. This scenario was chosen so that we may illustrate and 
assess the downside risk. 
 
The baseline comparison scenario used was RCP 4.5, described as an intermediate scenario, with global temperature rise kept within 2-
3°C. This scenario is estimated using current policies, and other scenarios have been compared to this to establish the likelihood of risks 
occurring. 
 
Short, Medium and Long Term Climate-Related Risks & Opportunities 
 
Our risk identification and prioritisation exercise has been reviewed against four timeframes: 1) present (< 3 years), in line with our current 
and next financial planning cycle; 2) short term (3-5 years), in line with our strategic planning cycle; 3) medium term (6-10 years), in line 
with our near-term SBTi commitments (2030); 4) and the long term (10 years+), in line with our net-zero commitment year (2040). The 
table below highlights our key transitional and physical risks, the mitigation plans we currently have in place, and the changes we intend to 
make to ensure that long-term risks are included in our strategic thinking. 
 
Our transitional risks have been modelled against the RCP 2.6 pathway as it presents the most material impacts to our business model. 
The impacts of the RCP 8.5 pathway are deemed negligible (except for consumer expectations), because the potential costs (in the form 
of taxes & levies) are deemed to be in line with those seen in current policies.     
 
TRANSITIONAL RISKS & OPPORTUNITIES 
Risk(s) 
Description 
Timeframe 
Mitigation Strategy & Opportunities 
FY2024 update 
Carbon 
Pricing – 
Electricity 
(High 
Financial 
Impact) 
 
 
 
/ 
 
Market 
demand for 
renewable 
electricity 
(Medium 
Financial 
Impact) 
New 
regulatory 
developments 
on carbon 
pricing for 
utilities 
(electricity). 
 
/ 
 
Renewables 
demand 
outweighs 
supply, 
increasing 
costs. 
Short-term  
 
 
 
 
/ 
 
Short to 
medium-
term. 
• 
Between 60-65% of our scope 1 & 2 
emission are from the electricity we use in 
our pubs and offices. We have a 
commitment to procuring 80% of our 
electricity from renewable sources by 
2025, and 100% by 2030.  
 
• 
Opportunity: Greene King is exploring 
opportunities to safeguard our renewable 
electricity procurement on a longer-term 
basis, as well as fixing costs to mitigate 
against an ever-changing market. This 
involves a review of power purchase 
agreements (PPAs) and exploring self-
generation options. In FY23 we installed 
solar panel trials at both a pub and a 
support centre (office) We see a 
combination of PPA’s and self-generation 
as key to removing our scope 2 emissions 
and securing our energy supply over the 
long-term. 
 
• 
Our energy efficiency strategy will 
continue to explore opportunities to 
reduce usage, through behavioural change 
and testing of new technology. Our 
balanced scorecard includes energy 
reduction targets to ensure the entire 
business is focused on lowering 
consumption. 
• 
In 2024 Greene King 
joined the RE100 global 
initiative, an organisation 
that brings together the 
world’s most influential 
companies leading the 
transition to 100% 
renewable energy. In 2024 
we also matched 100% of 
energy consumption 
against specific certified 
renewable generation.  
 
Carbon 
Pricing – Gas 
& Other 
Fuels 
New 
regulatory 
developments 
on carbon 
Short-term  • 
There are two significant areas that 
contribute to our scope 1 footprint: 
 
1) Gas usage in our kitchens to deliver the 
1) 
Work was completed at 
40 more sites to ensure 
we are ready to change 
the kitchens from using 

37 Strategic Report | Corporate Governance | Financial Statements 
(High 
Financial 
Impact) 
 
 
pricing for 
utilities 
(natural gas 
and fuels). 
food that we sell to our customers. We 
have identified the electric equipment 
needed to continue to deliver our 
different branded menus at the same high 
quality, and as part of our 5-year strategic 
plan, we have agreed a significant 
investment in making our kitchens 'electric 
ready'. This involves the upgrading of 
infrastructure and power supplies to our 
pubs. Gas equipment will be swapped for 
the electric equivalent on an 'end-of-life' 
basis, so as to not discard current 
equipment quicker than necessary. 
Efficiency savings will be sought to ensure 
that running costs are at parity. 
 
2) Gas usage in heating our pubs and 
offices. Technology in this space is evolving 
rapidly, and therefore we are taking a 
measured approach. In FY23 we installed 
our first trials of an air sourced heat 
pump, and we subsequently installed a 
further 2 in FY24. We are also in 
discussions to trial hydrogen as an 
alternative source of heating. Current 
technology is expensive, especially the 
infrastructural upgrades needed to retrofit 
existing properties, and the variety of our 
pubs is extensive in both age and layout. A 
multi-faceted approach will therefore be 
needed to decarbonise property heating. 
We will continue to monitor technological 
progress, and trial in our sites accordingly. 
 
• 
Our energy efficiency strategy will 
continue to explore opportunities to 
reduce usage, through behavioural change 
and testing of new technology. Our 
balanced scorecard includes energy 
reduction targets to ensure the entire 
business is focused on lowering 
consumption. 
 
gas to electricity to cook 
as we continue to roll out 
our 5-year plan. 18 sites 
made the switch to 
electric only equipment. 
2) 
We have continued our 
research into alternative 
technology for heating in 
our pubs. We’ve now 
completed heat pump 
trials in 4 sites over the 
past two financial years, 
with overwhelmingly 
positive feedback from 
team and customers on 
the pub environment 
Hydrogen is not currently 
a feasible solution due to 
our diverse pub location 
and structure. We 
continue to monitor 
technological progress 
and innovation in this 
space, and trial in our 
sites accordingly. In 2024 
we began to study the 
opportunity to optimise 
biogas for our operations 
and will continue to 
research this and similar 
solutions.  
Carbon 
Pricing – 
Supply Chain 
(High 
Financial 
Impact) 
New 
regulatory 
developments 
on carbon 
pricing that will 
impact our 
supply chain 
cost base 
(meat, dairy, 
beer and other 
drinks). 
Short-term  • 
This risk aligns to the hotspots in our 
scope 3 baseline footprint, namely the 
goods and services we sell in our pubs. It 
is assumed that cost increases in our 
supply chain will flow through into our 
business.  
 
• 
Our initial strategy on scope 3 reductions 
has been focused on supplier engagement, 
and data collection. In Q4 of FY23 we held 
a supplier conference with around 200 of 
our largest food, drink, property, and IT 
suppliers, and during this conference we 
launched our new supplier platform, 
Greene King Engage. Our first step to 
removing emissions from our value chain 
is to collect information on our supplier 
base, firstly to understand their current 
sustainability journey, and secondly to 
begin to understand where collaboration 
may be possible.  
 
• 
Opportunity: We are exploring 
investment opportunities with both 
existing and new suppliers to provide 
sustainable solutions. We believe that 
The focus for sustainability in 
procurement in 2024 was 
beginning to hold conversations 
with nine of our key food 
suppliers and eight of our key 
drinks suppliers to understand 
their sustainability goals and 
strategies discuss in greater 
depth our goals, commitments 
and legal obligations, and begin 
to explore mutually beneficial 
actions on sustainability. The 
products that we purchase 
from these initial food and 
drink suppliers contribute 
approximately 27% of our total 
carbon footprint.  
Following the launch of GK 
Engage, our supplier 
sustainability engagement 
platform, in 2023, we asked 
property and GNFR suppliers 
to complete the sustainability 
questionnaire to understand 
the maturity of their 
approaches to sustainability in 
2024. In total across our food, 

38 
decarbonising our supply chain is a joint 
effort, and we are looking for 
opportunities to build partnerships that 
create long-term value.  
 
• 
The key to creating a low-carbon value 
chain is to ensure that sustainability is kept 
at the heart of business decisions, 
alongside financial and customer-led 
considerations. In FY23 we began to 
appraise investment decisions through the 
lens of emissions savings alongside financial 
returns. In FY24 we will expand on this to 
ensure that all environmental and social 
impacts are considered. 
 
drink, property, GNFR & IT 
suppliers, 427 have completed 
the questionnaire. Additionally, 
we used the platform to engage 
our food supply chains on the 
availability of information of the 
traceability and origins of any 
high-risk deforestation 
commodities, as defined by 
SBTi, as the first step of our 
due diligence for meeting the 
SBTi FLAG no deforestation 
commitment.   
 
Consumer 
Expectation  
(Low 
Financial 
Impact) 
The evolution 
of customer 
expectations of 
business 
sustainability 
could impact 
group 
revenues. 
 
Short, 
medium & 
long-term 
• 
The customer base in our managed pubs 
divisions is broad and varies by brand. It’s 
important that we understand their views 
from an environmental perspective and 
therefore we undertake an annual insights 
exercise. These results are overlaid with 
our brand customer segmentation, and 
guidance is provided for brands to 
consider in their strategic planning cycle. 
 
• 
Opportunity: These insights allow us to 
be market-leading in the issues that our 
customers are most concerned by. This 
data, paired with our detailed carbon 
footprint, ensures our investments are 
focused and gives us the agility needed to 
capitalise on opportunities to take market 
share. 
 
• 
We believe that changes in consumer 
expectation will be similar in the RCP 8.5 
pathway albeit may evolve at a higher 
velocity compared to RCP 2.6. It is our 
view that our mitigation strategy would 
remain the same in this scenario, and the 
annual insights exercise would be sufficient 
to keep us agile in our decision making. 
 
• 
Our business-to-business (B2B) customers 
are equally concerned with decarbonising 
their own value chain and will expect 
Greene King to deliver on commitments. 
Customers are making it clear that 
tendering for business is no longer purely 
about product and price, but also about 
sustainability. We are transparent in any 
tender process about our progress, our 
future plans and investments, but also use 
it as an opportunity to educate customers 
on the differing claims of sustainability and 
carbon neutrality. 
No material change. We 
continue to monitor our 
customer perception with an 
annual customer insights 
research project, which noted 
no material changes to our 
customers perception of 
sustainability and primary 
focuses for 2024 remained the 
cost of living for our customer 
base.  
 

39 Strategic Report | Corporate Governance | Financial Statements 
Our physical risks have been modelled against the RCP 8.5 pathway as it presents the greatest physical changes to our world. While there 
will still be changes in an RCP 2.6 pathway, the impacts to our properties will be far less severe, similar in nature and frequency to what 
we are seeing in the world today. We therefore believe those incremental changes to be negligible on our current business model. 
  
PHYSICAL RISKS & OPPORTUNITIES 
Risk(s) 
Description 
Timeframe 
Mitigation Strategy & Opportunities 
2024 
Flooding 
Changing 
weather 
patterns and 
sea-level rises 
lead to 
increased 
flooding 
events. 
 
Present 
• 
Our asset database has been run through 
the Carbon Trust physical screening tool 
(WRI aqueduct – flood risk) to provide 
guidance on properties at increased risk 
from either coastal or riverine flooding, 
under a high emissions / RCP 8.5 scenario. 
We have identified the sites in our estate 
with some level of future risk, the majority 
being riverine risk. Aside from revenue 
risk from closures, and cost increases 
from repair works, our insurance 
premiums could also be affected if claims 
are more frequent. 
 
• 
Our current property compliance 
programme pro-actively manages 
properties with a current risk of flooding. 
These programmes include annual 
inspections, and remediation works 
needed to minimise these risks, including 
works to flood gates, car park gullies and 
sump pump maintenance. 
 
• 
The analysis of future flood risks will be 
used to monitor the necessity of future 
flood prevention programmes, as well as 
liaising with local authorities (environment 
agency) to identify further works.  
 
• 
Opportunity: The outputs from the 
flood risk analysis can be used as inputs for 
future divestment or acquisition decisions, 
to maximise the value created from such 
opportunities. 
• 
No material changes to 
our mitigation processes.  
Temperature 
Rise & 
Weather 
Variability 
Long-term 
temperature 
rises and 
unpredictable 
weather events 
impact 1) pub 
operations, 2) 
supply chains 
and 3) 
consumer 
habits. 
Medium to 
long-term 
• 
Both short-term weather events, and 
longer-term climate change (including 
temperature change) are presenting risks 
to multiple areas of the business: 
1. 
Heat stress may affect staff 
productivity, especially those working 
in our kitchens. This might 
necessitate the review of our cooling 
systems and potentially lead to 
additional capital investment. 
2. 
Supply chains may be affected (for 
example, from droughts), disrupting 
the availability of product sold in our 
pubs and to our customers.  
3. 
Increased changeability in weather 
patterns such as heatwaves followed 
by heavy rainfall can lead to localised 
flooding.  
 
• 
The mitigation of this risk by teams from 
across our business. 
1. 
Our property teams are tasked with 
ensuring that the pub environments 
our team members are working in 
are fit for purpose, and fully 
compliant with legislation. They liaise 
regularly with our operations teams 
in a matrix working structure to 
• 
No material changes or 
mitigation processes 
remain the same. 

40 
ensure we have visibility of emerging 
issues and can react in an agile 
manner. 
2. 
Our supply chain and procurement 
teams are responsible for continuous 
availability of product within our 
businesses, and any disruptions from 
climate related incidents will be 
managed pro-actively in a similar way. 
3. 
The number of brands within our 
business ensure that we are 
diversified enough to mitigate 
changeable weather. We will 
continue to review our brand 
portfolio in line with changing 
consumer habits especially in the face 
of more volatile weather events. 
Opportunity: During the Covid 
pandemic, we invested heavily in the 
outdoor spaces of our pubs and will 
continue to do so. As temperature 
continues to rise in the long-term, 
the appetite for using these spaces 
will only increase. 
 
Water 
Scarcity 
Prolonged 
periods of 
drought affect 
the availability 
of water.  
Medium to 
long-term 
• 
A drop in water availability would impact 
every area of our business, but our 
mitigation strategies are focused on areas 
that we can impact internally, being the 
management of water usage within our 
pubs and breweries. 
 
• 
Significant investments into our breweries 
since 2019, including new centrifuges in 
our Bury St Edmunds brewery and a new 
water treatment plant at our Dunbar 
brewery, have improved our water 
efficiency. 
 
• 
We are trialling the use of smart meters in 
fifty of our pub sites. These will give us 
additional information on water usage, and 
provide early indications of leaks, allowing 
our property maintenance team to action 
quick fixes.  
Opportunity: The output of our smart 
meter trials can be used as inputs for 
future divestment or acquisition decisions, 
to maximise the value created from such 
opportunities. 
 
In 2024 we began to investigate 
partners to support our water 
strategy and looked into this 
risk in detail. In 2025 we will 
begin an optimisation study 
into our water footprint for 
our pub operations.  
 
In 2024 Greene King 
announced that it will be 
investing in a new brewery in 
Bury St Edmunds. The new 
brewery aims to reduce water 
usage in Greene King’s brewing 
process by up to 50% per pint.  
 
 
Organisational Resilience 
 
Our 2023 strategic planning cycle included our first decarbonisation roadmap. This roadmap would allow us to achieve our SBTi-approved 
near-term commitments (2030). While our planning cycle is over five years, the decarbonisation roadmap is a longer-term plan to meet 
our previously published target of net-zero by 2040. The group capital allocation exercise in our strategic planning allowed for the 
infrastructural upgrades needed to push towards a key target of our net-zero journey, namely the decarbonisation of our own operations. 
However, this was prior to the risk mapping exercise that we undertook as part of our first CFD report and the assessed financial impacts. 
Therefore, while we believe our business to be resilient against the transitional risks in scenario RCP 2.6, and against the physical risks in 
scenario RCP 8.5, our FY24 strategic planning process was intended to include stress-testing using the risk outputs from our modelling. 
However, due to a lack of data, we rolled this target in to FY25 and focused our concentration on increasing our data availability in FY24 
to support this programme. 
 
Metrics and Targets  
 
Our environmental strategy is laid out on page 26 of this report. 
 

41 Strategic Report | Corporate Governance | Financial Statements 
To this end, the following targets and commitments were made, which will help mitigate the transitional climate-related risks present in 
our operating model. As our understanding of our value chain improves, and technology improves in key areas, our metrics will adapt 
accordingly. We expect the metrics to be updated in 2025. 
 
The calculation methodology for each metric listed is as follows: 
 
• 
Fossil fuel consumption: In kWh, the total consumption of natural gas, propane, kerosene & gas oil (heating oil). These fuels are 
used for both heating (and hot water) and cooking in our properties. 
• 
% of estate powered by renewable electricity: The consumption of electricity covered by the purchase of Guarantees of Origin 
(GoO), as a % of our total electricity consumption. 
• 
Electricity consumption: In kWh, the total consumption of electricity to power our properties. 
• 
% of suppliers signed up to our Greene King Engage platform: Of the first 85 suppliers invited onto our supplier engagement 
platform, the % that had completed our ‘kickstart assessment’. This assessment has given us a view of our suppliers’ sustainability 
ambitions and current status.  
• 
% of suppliers that have set net-zero targets (SBTi or equivalent): Of the first 85 suppliers invited onto our supplier engagement 
platform, the % with net-zero targets, including those not yet ratified by the SBTi. 
• 
Number of meals diverted from waste via ‘Too Good to Go’: The number of meals diverted from waste via the ‘Too Good to 
Go’ platform.  
• 
Food waste (in kg) per 100 covers: The total weight of food waste (in kg) per 100 covers. This has been normalised to account 
for changes in trade and allow us to track on a LFL basis.  
• 
Number of EV charging points bays installed in the estate: The total number of usable charging bays installed in our pubs and 
support centres. A portion of installed bays were awaiting connection to the grid at year end. 
• 
% of managed estate with available charging points: The % of our managed pubs estate with at least one live usable charging bay 
at year end. 

42 
Metrics & Targets 
Target 
Associated Risk 
Metric / KPI 
2024 Progress 
Baseline (2019 unless 
stated) 
Challenges 
Reduce absolute scope 
1 & 2 GHG emissions 
by 50% by 2030 
Carbon Pricing – 
Gas & Other Fuels 
(Scope 1) Fossil fuel consumption usage in kWh  
289,038,270 
354,004,113 
 
Carbon Pricing – 
Electricity 
 
(Scope 2) % of estate powered by renewable electricity. 
 
100% 
0% 
Volatile pricing on renewables 
market. 
(Scope 2) Electricity consumption in kWh 
 
289,923,545 
331,621,314 
 
Reduce absolute scope 
3 GHG emissions by 
50% by 2030 
 
Carbon Pricing – 
Supply Chain 
% of suppliers who have been invited and have completed our 
sustainability questionnaire on our Greene King Engage 
platform.  
 
88% 
0% 
 
Footprinting and target setting can 
be cost / resource prohibitive for 
smaller suppliers. 
 
% of suppliers that have set net-zero targets (SBTi or 
equivalent).  
36%  
Unknown 
Reduce food waste by 
50% by 2030 
Consumer 
Expectations 
Number of meals saved from waste via ‘Too Good to Go’. 
 
208,688 
Launched in 2019 
 
Food waste (in kg) per 100 covers 
  
12.76 
13.40 
Measurement systems need to be 
identified to fully understand sources 
of waste. 
 
Rollout EV charging 
points  
Consumer 
Expectations 
Number of EV charging points bays installed in the estate. 
1,450 
0 
 
 
Connection delays to grid due to 
DNO capacity. 
% of managed estate with available charging points. 
20%. A further 1.5% of the estate 
was on-site or awaiting 
electrification. 
0% 
 

 
 
The statements below reflect our commitment to, and management of, people, communities, the environment, human rights, anti-bribery 
and anti-corruption in the last 12 months.  
Communities and Environment  
We have a history of supporting communities throughout England, Scotland and Wales with our pubs providing important spaces for 
communities to come together, connect and feel a sense of belonging. We have a number of community and charity programmes which 
are highlighted on page 32 of this report. In 2022 Environment & Social was added a strategy driver for our business and we committed 
to, and had validation of, our near-term science-based targets. Our environmental commitments are highlighted on page 28 of this report. 
Details of our greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions are on page 30.  
 
Employees and statement on employee engagement  
It is our policy to ensure that team members are selected, recruited, developed, remunerated and promoted on the basis of their skill 
and suitability for the work performed. The company is committed to treating all team members fairly and equally and will endeavour to 
provide workplace adaptions and training for team members or candidates who have a disability and team members who become disabled 
during their employment. Our Inclusion and Diversity policy ensures the equal treatment of all employees, and our disability agenda is 
further supported by an Employee Led Inclusion Group, Ability that raises awareness and support for all employees living with visible and 
non-visible disabilities. Further details can be found in our Environmental, Social & Governance section on page 26 and our Section 172 
statement on page 15. 
Our established internal communications channels push information across the organisation regularly and we facilitate an anonymous 
annual engagement survey and half year pulse survey to listen to employee feedback and facilitate actions plans to drive change where 
needed. In line with our Inclusion and Diversity policy we apply a diversity data reporting overlay to identify further the engagement 
levels of our marginalised communities and act where needed.  
Our balanced scorecard tool, Dartboard, is updated and communicated periodically showing our employees performance levels overall 
for the organisation including people, financial and customer metrics. This is linked to managers bonus payments and is further 
communicated and embedded at conferences, townhalls and in regular cascades to our senior leadership group.  
 
Human rights  
In 2024 Greene King released our Human Rights policy and in early 2025 our Modern Slavery policy. The policies support our 
commitment to act ethically and with integrity in all our business dealings and relationships and to implementing and enforcing effective 
systems and controls to ensure the abuse of human rights and modern slavery do not exist in our business or in any of our supply chains. 
 
Our code of conduct provides that all team members are to be treated with respect, and their health, safety and basic human rights 
protected and promoted. It covers a range to topics including modern slavery, working conditions, child labour, discrimination and anti-
corruption and anti-bribery measures, including a specific anti-bribery policy. 
 
We expect our suppliers and sub-contractors to comply with the provisions of our code or meet the same standard through their own 
code.  
 
Our whistleblowing policy for our team members encourages them to report any wrongdoing, including human rights violations such as 
modern slavery or human trafficking and any concerns with bribery. Our teams are able to report via a confidential external supplier 
email or hotline and no significant issues were raised during the year. Further details can be found in our Environmental, Social & 
Governance section on page 26 and see the full modern slavery statement on our website. 
 
Data privacy – the company has paid particular attention to embedding data privacy into the company’s ways of working through a 
governance committee, incident management, training and awareness, quality control and a change programme that focuses on privacy 
by design and default. For an explanation of how the company uses the personal data see the privacy notice at 
www.greeneking.co.uk/privacy. 
 
Anti-corruption and bribery  
All forms of bribery are prohibited across all Greene King operations, in all our locations and in all of our interactions with any third 
parties, and whether by Greene King team members or by third parties on our behalf. We do not make payments or give cash equivalents 
or anything else of value to secure an unfair business advantage, nor do we make payments or provide any benefit to government officials 
to obtain business, favourable treatment or to avoid a fine or penalty. We do not permit the payment of facilitation payments or such 
like to speed up the performance of government officials. 
We have in place online anti-bribery training for our support centre staff and pub managers which explains the law and the responsibility 
each team member faces. Our gifts and hospitality policy requires that all gifts must be recorded on a central database. Gifts over £250 
also require line manager’s approval and anything more than £5,000 requires permission from the Chief Executive Officer.  
The strategic report has been approved by the directors and signed on behalf of the directors by: 
 
 
 
 
 
Richard Smothers  
Director 
 

44 
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE 
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT 
Background 
The board has adopted a governance code appropriate to its status as a large private company incorporated in the UK and a member of a 
Hong Kong listed group. 
The arrangements, which were adopted by the board in February 2020, are broadly based on the Wates Principles for large private 
companies but have been adapted to recognise the company’s position as a member of the CK Asset Holdings Limited (CKA) group. The 
principles adopted by the board cover the following six pillars: 
Purpose and leadership 
This requires the board to ensure that the company has a clear sense of purpose, collective vision and strategy to generate long-term 
sustainable growth and to promote the success of the company.  
The company has continued to focus on its eight strategy drivers, and strong progress has been achieved throughout 2024 with a view to 
becoming the Pride of British Hospitality. Projects focused on the evolution of our brands, building strong foundations via transformations 
initiatives and understanding and delivering for our customers, which continued to inform the company’s strategic direction in 2024.  
With the support of the board throughout 2024, the company; 
- 
reduced the size of the executive board from 10 to seven which, following a period of business and transformational change, will 
enable the business to leverage the investments made and be more agile and efficient; 
- 
invested in the Hickory’s brand with the conversion and introduction of six new sites in 2024, helping to grow a balanced portfolio 
of sustainable brands; 
- 
announced plans to invest £40m in a state-of-the-art brewery in Bury St Edmunds, next to our new distribution centre. The custom-
built, modern facility will provide a long-term future commitment to British brewing. Operations will continue at the existing Westgate 
Brewery until completion of the new site in 2027. 
The board committee, with the support of the board, devoted time to preparing clear identifiable plans and priorities for 2025, ensuring 
that the business has a clear sense of direction and collective vision for the year ahead.  
Board composition 
This focuses on the role of the chair and other board members, requiring them to provide constructive challenge to management to ensure 
effective decision making in the best interest of the company.  
The chairman of the company, George Magnus, has considerable experience as a non-executive director and chairman. His role is key to 
ensuring that the board provides well considered and effective decision making and constructive challenge to management. The non-
executive directors of the board, appointees of CKA, are experienced executives with a range of skills and experience, including in the 
retail sector. Throughout board meetings all directors are given the opportunity to ask questions of management and to offer their insight 
and experience where relevant. 
Director responsibilities 
This requires the board to establish and maintain corporate governance practices that provide clear lines of accountability and responsibility 
to support effective decision making. 
The board has approved a schedule of responsibilities setting out matters requiring board approval. These include the following: 
– 
approval of the long-term strategy of the company;  
– 
extension of the group’s activities into new businesses or geographic areas and approval of all significant corporate acquisitions 
or disposals by the group; 
– 
approval of major changes to the group’s corporate structure; 
– 
approval of the annual statutory accounts; 
– 
changes to the governance structure of the group; and 
– 
approval of new board appointments. 
The board continues to utilise its board committee whose members comprise representatives from CKA and the Chief Executive Officer, 
Chief Financial Officer and Chief Experience Officer of Greene King. The board committee has the delegated authority to make certain 
decisions relating to the management and operation of the company, as set out in the schedule of responsibilities approved the board. 
Matters for which the board committee has responsibility include: 
- 
approval of the annual operating and capital expenditure budgets; 
- 
approval of the funding strategy and debt structure; 
- 
approval of any significant changes to the group’s management and control structure; 
- 
the declaration or recommendation of dividends; 
- 
approval of any significant changes in accounting policies or practices; 
- 
determining the remuneration policy of the company and; 
- 
approval of executive pay. 
Operational controls are managed via an authorities matrix, which is approved by the board and rolled out across the business. 
Amendments were made during 2024 to the authorities matrix with the approval of the board to reflect the changes in organisational 

45 Strategic Report | Corporate Governance | Financial Statements 
structure as well as to improve operational efficiency and governance. 
In April 2024 during a board meeting, the board approved the Greene King Limited 2023 annual report. 
The board committee passed a number of resolutions including various banking related approvals. 
The 2025 budget was approved by the board committee in a meeting held in December 2024. The board committee meeting was also 
attended by certain members of the board who are not board committee members and who were provided the opportunity to ask 
any questions and provide their views. 
Opportunity and risk  
This requires the company to create and preserve value and establish oversight for the identification and mitigation of risks to the business 
to ensure the promotion of long-term sustainability and success. During the year the board was kept fully informed of the actions taken 
by management to manage costs, deal with wage pressures, and actions to mitigate eroding consumer spending power in some areas of 
the business. Potential opportunities for the business were also discussed with the board throughout the year, including the development 
of brand concepts and new areas of business as well as other opportunities to improve the customer or employee offer.  
Details of the risks facing the business are set out in the section on principal risks and uncertainties section within the strategic report. 
In addition to the risk management processes outlined in the principal risks and uncertainties section of this report, the key elements of 
the group’s internal control framework are: 
• 
the governance arrangements outlined above; 
• 
the group’s defined management structure with suitable authority limits and responsibilities, staffed by appropriate personnel; 
• 
regular updates for the board on strategy; 
• 
a comprehensive planning and financial reporting procedure including annual budgets and a longer-term strategic plan, both of 
which will be reviewed and approved by the board;   
• 
ongoing monitoring by both the board and senior management of performance against budgets, through the periodic reporting 
of detailed management accounts and key performance indicators; 
• 
ongoing monitoring by the board of compliance with financial covenants; 
• 
a centralised financial reporting system and close process, with controls and reconciliation procedures designed to facilitate the 
production of the consolidated accounts;  
• 
clearly defined evaluation and approval processes for acquisitions and disposals, capital expenditure and project control, with 
escalating levels of authority (including board approval for major acquisitions and disposals), detailed appraisal and review 
procedures and post-completion reviews; 
• 
review of retail operational compliance by the retail internal audit team and other analytical and control procedures facilitated 
by the EPOS till system; 
• 
audits conducted by the group internal audit function of business and functional control environments; and 
• 
documented policies to cover data protection, modern slavery, anti-bribery and whistle-blowing and regular updates on any 
incidents.  
Remuneration  
This requires the board to ensure that executive remuneration structures are aligned to the long-term sustainable success of the company 
and ensuring that remuneration for directors and senior managers is aligned with performance, behaviours and the achievement of the 
company’s purpose, values and strategy. 
The board committee approved executive pay, bonus and long-term incentive plan (LTIP) structures for 2024, with bonus arrangements 
which reflect achievement against the group’s balanced scorecard but also recognise individual behaviours and the achievement of the 
company’s strategic objectives. 
Stakeholder relationships and engagement  
This requires the board to ensure that the company conducts meaningful engagement with stakeholders, including the workforce, and has 
regard to their views when taking decisions. 
Further details of how the company has managed relationships and engaged with its various stakeholders can be found in the section on 
Directors’ duties under section 172 Companies Act 2006, in the strategic report. 
 
 
 
 
 
 

46 
DIRECTORS’ REPORT 
The directors present their annual report together with the audited financial statements for the 52-week period ended 29 December 
2024. The company has chosen in accordance with section 414C(11) of the Companies Act 2006 to include matters of strategic 
importance in the strategic report which otherwise would be required to be disclosed in the directors’ report.  
Stakeholder and employee engagement 
p 45 and 43 
Greenhouse gas emissions, energy consumption and 
energy efficiency              
p 30 
Corporate governance statement 
p 44 
Employing disabled persons                                                              
P 43 
The company 
Greene King Limited is a private limited company with registered office at Westgate Brewery, Bury St. Edmunds, Suffolk, IP33 1QT.  
Results and dividends 
The adjusted profit before tax and adjusting items was £67.3m for the 52 weeks to 29 December 2024 (prior period: £63.8m) and 
statutory loss before tax was £147.1m (prior period: profit £45.2m). The directors do not recommend the payment of a dividend to its 
sole shareholder this period (prior period: nil). 
Directors and their interests 
The directors during the period and to the date of this report, except stated otherwise, were as follows: 
N Mackenzie, Chief Executive Officer 
R Smothers, Director (Chief Financial Officer to 24 February 2025 and non-executive director thereafter) 
J Fearn, Chief Financial Officer (from 24 February 2025) 
D Dyson, Non-executive Director 
A Hunter, Non-executive Director 
L C G Ma, Non-executive Director 
P Macnab, Non-executive Director  
G Magnus, Non-executive Chairman 
Future developments 
The group intends to continue to operate in the areas of management of public houses and the retailing of beers, wines, spirits and soft 
drinks for the foreseeable future, but the composition of the group’s reporting segments will change for FY25, as disclosed on page 7. 
Details of any events occurring after the year end are set out in note 30 in the financial statements.  
Financial instruments 
The group’s policy on the use of financial instruments is set out in note 22 to the financial statements. 
Charitable Donations  
Charitable donations made during the year are disclosed on page 32. 
Political Donations 
The Greene King group makes no political donations (prior period: nil). 
Going concern  
The group’s business activities, together with the factors likely to affect its future development, performance and position, are set out in 
the strategic review. The financial position of the group, its cash flows, liquidity position and borrowing facilities are described in the 
financial review. In addition, note 22 to the financial statements includes the group’s objectives, policies and processes for managing its 
capital; its financial risk management objectives; details of its financial instruments and hedging activities; and its exposure to credit and 
liquidity risk. 
The directors have made enquiries into the adequacy of the group’s financial resources through a thorough review of the financial 
commitments over the short and medium term and their impact on the group’s cash flow.  
The principal elements of the group’s financing structure are: 
• 
Unsecured bank facilities totalling £1,100m, comprising £700m of revolving credit facilities and £400m of term loan 
facilities, which are guaranteed by the group’s ultimate parent and mature in the period between November 2025 and 
March 2030. The facility expiring in November 2025 totals £300m and included in the total facilities of £1,100m are 
facilities renewed post year end totalling £400m; 
• 
Repayable on demand interest free loan of £311m from CKA Holdings UK Limited;  
• 
Unsecured revolving loan facility with CKA Holdings UK Limited of £1,500m expiring in November 2028; 
• 
Secured bonds issued out of the Greene King securitisation with a group carrying value of £957.8m (prior period: 
£1,019.5m) and an average life of six years (prior period: seven years), secured against 1,436 pubs (prior period: 1,460 
pubs) with a group carrying value of £2.0bn (prior period: £2.0bn); and  
• 
Liquidity facilities totalling £224.0m (prior period: £224.0m) which can only be used for the purpose of meeting the debt 
service obligations of the group’s securitisation vehicles should there ever be insufficient funds available from operations 
to meet such payments. There were no drawdowns under these facilities during the year and the drawn down amount 
at the year end was £nil (prior period: £nil).  
The undrawn facilities (excluding liquidity facilities) at the end of the financial year were £1,645m and at 30 March 2025 were 
£1,570m. 

47 Strategic Report | Corporate Governance | Financial Statements 
 
Based on the group’s current strategic plan the directors expect to meet the covenants of the Greene King securitisation during 
the period of 12 months from the date of approval of the financial statements.   
For the purpose of the group’s going concern assessment, the directors have modelled a remote scenario whereby the group 
generates just over 60% of its budgeted revenue and variable costs with no reduction in fixed costs and budgeted capex continues 
for a 12 month period. Under this scenario the group has access to adequate funding to support the business through a period 
of at least 12 months from the date of the approval of the financial statements. However, in the absence of any support this 
deterioration in performance would likely result in a breach of the two-quarter lookback FCF DSCR covenant in Q1 FY26 within 
its securitised borrowings without mitigating actions. In this scenario the directors could elect to prevent the breach by providing 
financial support to the Greene King securitisation through lower operating cost re-charges from other group companies. The 
directors have a reasonable expectation that the group has sufficient resources to continue in operational existence for the 
period of at least 12 months from the date of approval of these financial statements. Accordingly, the directors continue to adopt 
a going concern basis for the preparation of the financial statements. 
Directors’ and officers’ indemnity insurance 
Insurance to indemnify the directors of the company against third party proceedings whilst serving on the board of the company and of 
any subsidiary has been taken out by the group. This cover indemnifies all team members of the group who serve on the boards of all 
subsidiaries. These indemnity policies subsisted throughout the period and remain in place at the date of this report. 
Statement as to disclosure of information to auditor 
Directors of the board at the time of approving this report are listed above. Having made enquiries of the company’s auditor, the directors 
confirm that: 
• 
to the best of their knowledge and belief, there is no information relevant to the preparation of this report of which the 
company’s auditor is unaware; and 
• 
they have taken all the steps a director might reasonably be expected to have taken to be aware of relevant audit information 
and to establish that the company’s auditor is aware of that information. 
This confirmation is given and should be interpreted in accordance with the provisions of section 418 of the Companies Act 2006. 
Auditor 
Deloitte LLP have audited these financial statements and have confirmed their willingness to continue as auditors going forwards. They will 
therefore be proposed for reappointment in accordance with section 485 of the Companies Act 2006. 
Statement of directors’ responsibilities 
The directors are responsible for preparing the Annual Report and the financial statements in accordance with applicable law and 
regulations. 
Company law requires the directors to prepare financial statements for each financial year. Under that law the directors have elected to 
prepare the group financial statements in accordance with United Kingdom adopted international accounting standards in conformity with 
the requirements of the Companies Act 2006. The financial statements also comply with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs) 
as issued by the IASB. The directors have chosen to prepare the parent company financial statements in accordance with United Kingdom 
Generally Accepted Accounting Practice (United Kingdom Accounting Standards and applicable law), including FRS 101 “Reduced 
Disclosure Framework”. Under company law the directors must not approve the financial statements unless they are satisfied that they 
give a true and fair view of the state of affairs of the company and of the profit or loss of the company for that period.  
In preparing the parent company financial statements, the directors are required to: 
• 
select suitable accounting policies and then apply them consistently; 
• 
make judgements and accounting estimates that are reasonable and prudent; 
• 
state whether applicable UK Accounting Standards have been followed, subject to any material departures disclosed and 
explained in the financial statements; and  
• 
prepare the financial statements on the going concern basis unless it is inappropriate to presume that the company will continue 
in business. 
In preparing the group financial statements, International Accounting Standard 1 requires that directors: 
• 
properly select and apply accounting policies; 
• 
present information, including accounting policies, in a manner that provides relevant, reliable, comparable and understandable 
information;  
• 
provide additional disclosures when compliance with the specific requirements of the financial reporting framework are 
insufficient to enable users to understand the impact of particular transactions, other events and conditions on the entity’s 
financial position and financial performance; and 
• 
make an assessment of the company’s ability to continue as a going concern. 
• 
The directors are responsible for keeping adequate accounting records that are sufficient to show and explain the company’s 
transactions and disclose with reasonable accuracy at any time the financial position of the company and enable them to ensure 
that the financial statements comply with the Companies Act 2006. They are also responsible for safeguarding the assets of the 
company and hence for taking reasonable steps for the prevention and detection of fraud and other irregularities. 
The directors are responsible for the maintenance and integrity of the corporate and financial information included on the company’s 
website. Legislation in the United Kingdom governing the preparation and dissemination of financial statements may differ from legislation 
in other jurisdictions. 
This report was approved by the board on 24 April 2025 and signed on its behalf. 
 
 
 
Richard Smothers 
Director 

48 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT TO THE MEMBERS OF 
GREENE KING LIMITED 
Opinion 
In our opinion: 
• 
the financial statements of Greene King Limited (the ‘parent company’) and its subsidiaries (the ‘group’) give a true and fair 
view of the state of the group’s and of the parent company’s affairs as at 29 December 2024 and of the group’s loss for the 
year then ended;  
• 
the group financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with United Kingdom adopted international accounting 
standards and IFRS Accounting Standards as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB);  
• 
the parent company financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting 
Practice, including Financial Reporting Standard 101 “Reduced Disclosure Framework”; and 
• 
the financial statements have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006. 
 
We have audited the financial statements which comprise: 
• 
the group income statement; 
• 
the group statement of comprehensive income; 
• 
the group and parent company balance sheets; 
• 
the group and parent company statements of changes in equity; 
• 
the group cash flow statement; 
• 
the related notes 1 to 44. 
 
The financial reporting framework that has been applied in the preparation of the group financial statements is applicable law and United 
Kingdom adopted international accounting standards and IFRS Accounting Standards as issued by the IASB. The financial reporting 
framework that has been applied in the preparation of the parent company financial statements is applicable law and United Kingdom 
Accounting Standards, including Financial Reporting Standard 101 “Reduced Disclosure Framework” (United Kingdom Generally 
Accepted Accounting Practice). 
Basis for opinion 
We conducted our audit in accordance with International Standards on Auditing (UK) (ISAs (UK)) and applicable law. Our responsibilities 
under those standards are further described in the auditor's responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements section of our report. 
 
We are independent of the group and the parent company in accordance with the ethical requirements that are relevant to our audit of 
the financial statements in the UK, including the Financial Reporting Council’s (the ‘FRC’s’) Ethical Standard, and we have fulfilled our 
other ethical responsibilities in accordance with these requirements. We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient 
and appropriate to provide a basis for our opinion. 
Conclusions relating to going concern 
In auditing the financial statements, we have concluded that the directors’ use of the going concern basis of accounting in the preparation 
of the financial statements is appropriate.  
 
Based on the work we have performed, we have not identified any material uncertainties relating to events or conditions that, individually 
or collectively, may cast significant doubt on the group’s and parent company’s ability to continue as a going concern for a period of at 
least twelve months from when the financial statements are authorised for issue.  
 
Our responsibilities and the responsibilities of the directors with respect to going concern are described in the relevant sections of this 
report. 
Other information 
The other information comprises the information included in the annual report, other than the financial statements and our auditor’s 
report thereon. The directors are responsible for the other information contained within the annual report. Our opinion on the financial 
statements does not cover the other information and, except to the extent otherwise explicitly stated in our report, we do not express 
any form of assurance conclusion thereon. 
 
Our responsibility is to read the other information and, in doing so, consider whether the other information is materially inconsistent 
with the financial statements or our knowledge obtained in the course of the audit, or otherwise appears to be materially misstated. If 
we identify such material inconsistencies or apparent material misstatements, we are required to determine whether this gives rise to a 
material misstatement in the financial statements themselves. If, based on the work we have performed, we conclude that there is a 
material misstatement of this other information, we are required to report that fact. 
 
We have nothing to report in this regard. 
Responsibilities of directors 
As explained more fully in the directors’ responsibilities statement, the directors are responsible for the preparation of the financial 
statements and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair view, and for such internal control as the directors determine is necessary 
to enable the preparation of financial statements that are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error. 
 
In preparing the financial statements, the directors are responsible for assessing the group’s and the parent company’s ability to continue 
as a going concern, disclosing, as applicable, matters related to going concern and using the going concern basis of accounting unless the 
directors either intend to liquidate the group or the parent company or to cease operations, or have no realistic alternative but to do so. 
 
 
 
 

49 Strategic Report | Corporate Governance | Financial Statements 
 
Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements 
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements as a whole are free from material misstatement, 
whether due to fraud or error, and to issue an auditor's report that includes our opinion. Reasonable assurance is a high level of assurance, 
but is not a guarantee that an audit conducted in accordance with ISAs (UK) will always detect a material misstatement when it exists. 
Misstatements can arise from fraud or error and are considered material if, individually or in the aggregate, they could reasonably be 
expected to influence the economic decisions of users taken on the basis of these financial statements. 
 
A further description of our responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements is located on the FRC’s website at: 
www.frc.org.uk/auditorsresponsibilities. This description forms part of our auditor’s report. 
 
Extent to which the audit was considered capable of detecting irregularities, including fraud 
Irregularities, including fraud, are instances of non-compliance with laws and regulations. We design procedures in line with our 
responsibilities, outlined above, to detect material misstatements in respect of irregularities, including fraud. The extent to which our 
procedures are capable of detecting irregularities, including fraud is detailed below.  
 
We considered the nature of the group’s industry and its control environment, and reviewed the group’s documentation of their policies 
and procedures relating to fraud and compliance with laws and regulations. We also enquired of management, internal audit, and the 
directors about their own identification and assessment of the risks of irregularities, including those that are specific to the group’s business 
sector.  
 
We obtained an understanding of the legal and regulatory frameworks that the group operates in, and identified the key laws and 
regulations that:  
• 
had a direct effect on the determination of material amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. These included 
UK Companies Act, pensions legislation, UK tax legislation; and 
• 
do not have a direct effect on the financial statements but compliance with which may be fundamental to the group’s 
ability to operate or to avoid a material penalty. These included data protection regulations, licensing regulations, the 
pub code, occupational health and safety regulations, employment regulation, responsible drinking regulations, planning 
and building legislation and environmental regulations. 
We discussed among the audit engagement team including relevant internal specialists such as tax, valuations, pensions, IT, financial 
instruments and real estate specialists regarding the opportunities and incentives that may exist within the organisation for fraud and 
how and where fraud might occur in the financial statements. 
 
As a result of performing the above, we identified the greatest potential for fraud in the following area, and our procedures performed 
to address it are described below: 
• 
Assessment of impairment in pub Property, Plant and Equipment (PPE) and Right-of-Use-Assets (ROUA) carrying 
amounts. Critical estimates include assumptions underlying future cash flows in management’s 5 Year Plan (The Plan) 
and the allocation of these to each pub, determining an appropriate discount rate and estimating the fair value less 
cost to sell of each pub. Our procedures included review and challenge of the assumptions in the Plan, engaging 
valuation specialists to assess the appropriate range for the discount rate, long-term growth rate, testing the mechanical 
accuracy of the value in use calculations, and engaging Real Estate specialists to assess the external valuers property 
valuations. 
 
In common with all audits under ISAs (UK), we are also required to perform specific procedures to respond to the risk of management 
override. In addressing the risk of fraud through management override of controls, we tested the appropriateness of journal entries and 
other adjustments; assessed whether the judgements made in making accounting estimates are indicative of a potential bias; and evaluated 
the business rationale of any significant transactions that are unusual or outside the normal course of business. 
 
 In addition to the above, our procedures to respond to the risks identified included the following: 
• 
reviewing financial statement disclosures by testing to supporting documentation to assess compliance with provisions of 
relevant laws and regulations described as having a direct effect on the financial statements; 
• 
performing analytical procedures to identify any unusual or unexpected relationships that may indicate risks of material 
misstatement due to fraud;  
• 
enquiring of management, internal audit and in-house legal counsel concerning actual and potential litigation and claims, and 
instances of non-compliance with laws and regulations; and  
• 
reading minutes of meetings of those charged with governance, reviewing internal audit reports, and reviewing 
correspondence with HMRC.  
Report on other legal and regulatory requirements 
Opinions on other matters prescribed by the Companies Act 2006 
In our opinion, based on the work undertaken in the course of the audit: 
• 
the information given in the strategic report and the directors’ report for the financial year for which the financial 
statements are prepared is consistent with the financial statements; and 
• 
the strategic report and the directors’ report have been prepared in accordance with applicable legal requirements. 
 
In the light of the knowledge and understanding of the group and of the parent company and their environment obtained in the course 
of the audit, we have not identified any material misstatements in the strategic report or the directors’ report. 
Matters on which we are required to report by exception 
Under the Companies Act 2006 we are required to report in respect of the following matters if, in our opinion: 
• 
adequate accounting records have not been kept by the parent company, or returns adequate for our audit have not been 
received from branches not visited by us; or 
• 
the parent company financial statements are not in agreement with the accounting records and returns; or 
• 
certain disclosures of directors’ remuneration specified by law are not made; or 
• 
we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit. 
 

50 
We have nothing to report in respect of these matters. 
 
Use of our report 
This report is made solely to the company’s members, as a body, in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the Companies Act 2006. 
Our audit work has been undertaken so that we might state to the company’s members those matters we are required to state to them 
in an auditor’s report and for no other purpose. To the fullest extent permitted by law, we do not accept or assume responsibility to 
anyone other than the company and the company’s members as a body, for our audit work, for this report, or for the opinions we have 
formed. 
 
 
 
 
 
Timothy Steel (Senior statutory auditor) 
For and on behalf of Deloitte LLP 
Statutory Auditor 
London, UK 
24 April 2025 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

51 Strategic Report | Corporate Governance | Financial Statements 
 
 
GROUP INCOME STATEMENT 
FOR THE 52 WEEKS ENDED 29 DECEMBER 2024 
 
 
 
 
52 weeks ended 
52 weeks ended 
 
 
29 December 2024 
31 December 2023 
 
Note 
£m 
£m 
Revenue 
3 
2,450.5 
2,375.4 
Operating costs 
4 
(2,466.9) 
(2,208.2) 
Operating (loss)/profit 
 
(16.4) 
167.2 
Analysed as: 
 
 
 
Adjusted operating profit 
 
198.0 
186.1 
Adjusting items 
5 
(214.4) 
(18.9) 
Finance income 
7 
6.8 
5.0 
Finance cost 
7 
(137.5) 
(127.0) 
Net finance cost  
 
(130.7) 
(122.0) 
Analysed as: 
 
 
 
Adjusted net finance costs 
 
(130.7) 
(122.3) 
Adjusting items 
5 
- 
0.3 
 
 
 
 
(Loss)/profit before tax 
 
(147.1) 
45.2 
Tax 
9 
(9.2) 
(5.1) 
Analysed as: 
 
 
 
Adjusted tax 
 
(21.6) 
(15.8) 
Adjusting items 
5 
12.4 
10.7 
 
 
 
 
(Loss)/profit attributable to equity holders of parent 
 
(156.3) 
40.1 
 
The notes on pages 57 to 97 form part of these financial statements. All activities derive from continuing operations. 

52 
 
GROUP STATEMENT OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME 
FOR THE 52 WEEKS ENDED 29 DECEMBER 2024 
 
Note 
52 weeks ended  
29 December 2024 
£m 
52 weeks ended  
31 December 2023 
£m 
(Loss)/profit for the period 
(156.3) 
40.1 
Other comprehensive income to be reclassified to the income statement in
subsequent periods 
 
Cash flow hedges: 
 
– Gains/(losses) on cash flow hedges taken to other comprehensive income 
22 
17.3 
(6.9) 
– Transfers to income statement on cash flow hedges 
22 
(0.5) 
0.6 
Deferred tax on cash flow hedges 
9 
(4.2) 
1.6 
12.6 
(4.7) 
Items not to be reclassified to the income statement in subsequent periods 
 
 
Remeasurement (losses)/gains on defined benefit pension schemes 
8 
(19.0) 
6.7 
Deferred Tax on remeasurement gains/(losses) 
9 
4.7 
(1.7) 
(14.3) 
5.0 
Other comprehensive (loss)/income for the period, net of tax 
(1.7) 
0.3 
Total comprehensive (loss)/income for the period, net of tax 
(158.0) 
40.4 
 
 
 
The notes on pages 57 to 97 form part of these financial statements.

53 Strategic Report | Corporate Governance | Financial Statements 
 
 
GROUP BALANCE SHEET 
AS AT 29 DECEMBER 2024 
 
29 December 2024 
31 December 2023 
Note 
£m 
£m 
Fixed assets  
 
Property, plant and equipment 
11 
 3,953.4  
3,983.5 
Investment property 
12 
 11.5  
6.0 
Right-of-use assets 
20 
 428.6  
503.0 
Intangibles 
10 
 13.8  
15.3 
Goodwill 
10 
 802.6  
924.7 
Other financial assets 
13 
 9.4  
8.9 
Trade and other receivables 
16 
 30.6  
5.0 
Post-employment assets 
8 
 48.4  
64.5 
 
5,298.3 
5,510.9 
Current assets 
 
 
 
Inventories 
15 
 56.2  
61.1 
Other financial assets 
13 
 4.9  
5.0 
Income tax receivable 
9 
 13.3  
14.0 
Trade and other receivables 
16 
 90.5  
116.8 
Prepayments 
 
 27.9  
20.8 
Cash and cash equivalents 
17 
104.5  
120.1 
 
297.3 
337.8 
Property, plant and equipment held for sale 
18 
4.2 
1.1 
 
301.5 
338.9 
Total assets 
 
5,599.8 
5,849.8 
Current liabilities 
 
 
 
Borrowings 
21 
 (953.9) 
(572.4) 
Lease liabilities 
20 
(25.1) 
(26.8) 
Derivative financial instruments 
22 
(1.0) 
(0.3) 
Trade and other payables 
19 
(450.1) 
(459.6) 
Income tax payable 
9 
- 
- 
Provisions 
23 
(10.9)  
(5.9) 
 
(1,441.0) 
(1,065.0) 
Non-current liabilities 
 
 
 
Borrowings 
21 
(1,268.3) 
(1,656.8) 
Lease Liabilities 
20 
(465.6) 
(531.0) 
Derivative financial instruments 
22 
(12.9) 
(30.4) 
Deferred tax liabilities 
9 
(76.7) 
(74.0) 
Provisions 
23 
(1.5) 
(0.8) 
 
(1,825.0) 
(2,293.0) 
Total liabilities 
 
(3,266.0) 
(3,358.0) 
Net assets 
 
2,333.8 
2,491.8 

54 
 
 
 
29 December 2024 
31 December 2023 
Note 
£m 
£m 
Issued capital and reserves 
 
 
 
Share capital  
24 
39.0  
39.0 
Share premium 
25 
1,184.4  
1,184.4 
Merger reserve 
25 
752.0  
752.0 
Capital redemption reserve 
25 
3.3  
3.3 
Hedging reserve 
22 
 (10.4)  
(23.0) 
Retained earnings 
 
365.5  
536.1 
Total equity 
 
2,333.8 
2,491.8 
 
The notes on pages 57 to 97 form part of these financial statements. 
The financial statements were approved by the board of directors and authorised for issue on 24 April 2025.  
They were signed on its behalf by: 
 
 
 
 
 
Richard Smothers 
Director

55 Strategic Report | Corporate Governance | Financial Statements 
 
 
 
GROUP CASH FLOW STATEMENT 
FOR THE 52 WEEKS ENDED 29 DECEMBER 2024 
 
 
Note 
 
 
52 weeks ended  
29 December 2024 
£m 
52 weeks ended 
31 December 2023 
£m 
Operating activities 
 
 
Operating (loss)/profit 
 
(16.4) 
167.2 
Operating adjusting items 
5 
214.4 
18.9 
Depreciation 
4 
153.5 
141.5 
Amortisation 
4 
1.5 
1.6 
Operating cash flows before working capital and adjusting cash items 
 
353.0 
329.2 
Working capital and adjusting items 
26 
(8.3) 
67.7 
Cash generated from operations  
 
344.7 
396.9 
Interest received 
 
3.4 
2.3 
Interest paid 
 
(136.2) 
(126.0) 
Tax paid 
 
(5.1) 
(13.9) 
Net cash flow from operating activities 
 
206.8 
259.3 
Investing activities 
 
 
 
Freehold reversions 
11 
(1.8) 
(9.4) 
Purchase of property, plant and equipment 
11 
(199.3) 
(215.3) 
Purchase of Investment property 
12 
(5.7) 
(1.1) 
Advances of trade loans 
13 
(6.9) 
(5.2) 
Repayment of trade loans 
13 
6.2 
5.2 
Sales of property, plant and equipment 
 
25.2 
4.4 
Net cash flow from investing activities 
 
(182.3) 
(221.4) 
Financing activities 
 
 
 
Repayment of borrowings 
27 
(387.8) 
(55.4) 
Advance of borrowings 
27 
380.0 
80.0 
Arrangement fees paid 
 
(1.4) 
- 
Repayments of lease liabilities 
27 
(30.9) 
(29.9) 
Net cash flow from financing activities 
 
(40.1) 
(5.3) 
Net (decrease)/increase in cash and cash equivalents 
 
(15.6) 
32.6 
Opening cash and cash equivalents 
17 
120.1 
87.5 
Closing cash and cash equivalents 
17 
104.5 
120.1 
The notes on pages 57 to 97 form part of these financial statements. 

56 
GROUP STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY 
FOR THE 52 WEEKS ENDED 29 DECEMBER 2024 
 
Share 
capital 
Share 
premium
 
Merger 
reserve 
Capital 
redemption 
reserve 
 
Hedging 
reserve 
 
Retained 
earnings 
 
Total 
equity 
Note 
£m 
£m
£m 
£m 
£m 
£m 
£m 
At 1 January 2023 
 
39.0
1,184.4
752.0 
3.3 
(18.3) 
491.0 
2,451.4 
Profit for the period 
     3
-
-
- 
- 
- 
40.1 
40.1 
Other comprehensive income: 
 
 
 
 
 
Actuarial gain on defined benefit 
pension schemes (net of tax) 
8,9
-
-
- 
- 
- 
5.0 
5.0 
Net loss on cash flow hedges (net of 
tax) 
    22
-
-
- 
- 
(4.7) 
- 
(4.7) 
Total comprehensive 
income/(expense) 
 
-
-
- 
- 
(4.7) 
45.1 
40.4 
At 31 December 2023 
39.0
1,184.4
752.0 
3.3 
(23.0) 
536.1 
2,491.8 
Loss for the period 
      3
-
-
- 
- 
- 
(156.3) 
(156.3) 
Other comprehensive income/(loss): 
 
 
 
 
 
Actuarial loss on defined benefit 
pension schemes (net of tax) 
8,9
-
-
- 
- 
- 
(14.3) 
(14.3) 
Net gain on cash flow hedges (net of 
tax) 
    22
-
-
- 
- 
12.6 
- 
12.6 
Total comprehensive 
(expense)/income 
-
-
- 
- 
12.6 
(170.6) 
(158.0) 
At 29 December 2024 
39.0
1,184.4
752.0 
3.3 
(10.4) 
365.5 
2,333.8 
 
 
 
The notes on pages 57 to 97 form part of these financial statements. 
 

57 Strategic Report | Corporate Governance | Financial Statements 
 
NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS 
FOR THE 52 WEEKS ENDED 29 DECEMBER 2024 
1 BASIS OF PREPARATION 
Corporate information 
The consolidated financial statements of Greene King Limited for the period ended 29 December 2024 were authorised for issue by 
the board of directors on 24 April 2025. Greene King Limited is a private company limited by shares incorporated and domiciled in 
England and Wales. 
Statement of compliance 
The group’s financial statements have been prepared in accordance with United Kingdom adopted International Financial Reporting 
Standards (IFRS) in conformity with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006 as they apply to the financial statements of the group 
for the 52 weeks ended 29 December 2024 (prior period: 52 weeks ended 31 December 2023). The financial statements have been 
prepared on the historical cost basis, except for financial instruments as explained in the accounting policies below. 
Basis of preparation 
The consolidated financial statements have been prepared in accordance with those parts of the Companies Act 2006 applicable to 
companies reporting under IFRS (UK). They are presented in millions of pounds sterling, with values rounded to the nearest hundred 
thousand, except where otherwise indicated. 
Basis of consolidation 
The consolidated financial statements incorporate the financial statements of Greene King Limited, its subsidiaries and Greene King 
Finance plc and Greene King Finance Parent Limited. Greene King Finance plc is a structured entity set up to raise bond finance for the 
group.  
The Law Debenture Intermediary Corporation plc holds the shares of Greene King Finance Parent Limited under a declaration of trust 
for charitable purposes. The rights provided to the group through the securitisation give the group the power over this company and the 
ability to use that power to affect its exposure to variable returns from them. As Greene King Limited has full control over these entities, 
they are fully consolidated. The financial statements of subsidiaries are prepared for the same reporting period as the parent company 
with adjustments made to their financial statements to bring their accounting policies in line with those used by the group. As such, the 
directors of Greene King Limited consider that these companies are controlled by the group, as defined in IFRS 10 ‘Consolidated Financial 
Statements’ and hence for the purpose of the consolidated financial statements they have been treated as subsidiary undertakings.  
The results of subsidiaries are consolidated from the date of acquisition, being the date on which the group obtains control, and continue 
to be consolidated until the date that such control ceases. Intercompany transactions, balances, income and expenses are eliminated on 
consolidation.  
Going concern 
The group’s business activities, together with the factors likely to affect its future development, performance and position, are set out in 
the strategic review. The financial position of the group, its cash flows, liquidity position and borrowing facilities are described in the 
financial review. In addition, note 22 to the financial statements includes the group’s objectives, policies and processes for managing its 
capital; its financial risk management objectives; details of its financial instruments and hedging activities; and its exposure to credit and 
liquidity risk. 
The directors have made enquiries into the adequacy of the group’s financial resources through a thorough review of the financial 
commitments over the short and medium term and their impact on the group’s cash flow.  
The principal elements of the group’s financing structure are: 
• 
Unsecured bank facilities totalling £1,100m, comprising £700m of revolving credit facilities and £400m of term loan facilities, 
which are guaranteed by the group’s ultimate parent and mature in the period between November 2025 and March 2030. The 
facility expiring in November 2025 totals £300m and included in the total facilities of £1,100m are facilities renewed post year 
end totalling £400m; 
• 
Repayable on demand interest free loan of £311m from CKA Holdings UK Limited;  
• 
Unsecured revolving loan facility with CKA Holdings UK Limited of £1,500m expiring in November 2028; 
• 
Secured bonds issued out of the Greene King securitisation with a group carrying value of £957.8m (prior period: £1,019.5m) 
and an average life of six years (prior period: seven years), secured against 1,436 pubs (prior period: 1,460 pubs) with a group 
carrying value of £2.0bn (prior period: £2.0bn); and  
• 
Liquidity facilities totalling £224.0m (prior period: £224.0m) which can only be used for the purpose of meeting the debt service 
obligations of the group’s securitisation vehicles should there ever be insufficient funds available from operations to meet such 
payments. There were no drawdowns under these facilities during the year and the drawn down amount at the year end was 
£nil (prior period: £nil).  
The undrawn facilities (excluding liquidity facilities) at the end of the financial year were £1,645m and at 30 March 2025 were £1,570m. 
Based on the group’s current strategic plan the directors expect to meet the covenants of the Greene King securitisation during 
the period of 12 months from the date of approval of the financial statements.   
For the purpose of the group’s going concern assessment, the directors have modelled a remote scenario whereby the group 
generates just over 60% of its budgeted revenue and variable costs with no reduction in fixed costs and budgeted capex continues 
for a 12 month period. Under this scenario the group has access to adequate funding to support the business through a period 
of at least 12 months from the date of the approval of the financial statements. However, in the absence of any support this 
deterioration in performance would likely result in a breach of the two-quarter lookback FCF DSCR covenant in Q1 FY26 within 

58 
its securitised borrowings without mitigating actions. In this scenario the directors could elect to prevent the breach by providing 
financial support to the Greene King securitisation through lower operating cost re-charges from other group companies. The 
directors have a reasonable expectation that the group has sufficient resources to continue in operational existence for the period 
of at least 12 months from the date of approval of these financial statements. Accordingly, the directors continue to adopt a going 
concern basis for the preparation of the financial statements. 
New accounting standards, amendments and interpretations adopted by the group 
The following new standards, interpretations and amendments to standards are mandatory for the group for the first time for their annual 
reporting period commencing 1 January 2024. 
Those standards and interpretations include: 
• 
Amendments to IAS 16 – Lease liability in sale-and-leaseback 
• 
Amendments to IAS 1 – Classification of Liabilities as Current or Non-current  
• 
Amendments to IFRS 7 and IAS 7 – Supplier Finance Arrangements 
The group has considered the above new standards and has concluded that they do not have a material effect. 
Standards issued but not yet effective 
A number of new standards and amendments to standards are effective for annual periods beginning after 1 January 2024 and earlier 
application is permitted; however, the group has not early adopted them in preparing these consolidated financial statements. The group 
is assessing the impact of the following new and amended standards, which have been issued or are awaiting endorsement by the UK 
Endorsement Board.  
– 
Amendments to IAS 21 – The Effects of Changes in Foreign Exchange Rates 
– 
Amendments to IFRS 9 and IFRS 7 – Financial Instruments and Financial Instruments: Disclosures 
– 
IFRS 18 Presentation and Disclosure in Financial Statements 
Critical accounting judgments and key sources of estimation uncertainty 
Critical accounting judgments 
In the course of preparing the financial statements, the key judgments made in the process of applying the group’s accounting policies are 
detailed below: 
Adjusting items 
Management uses a range of measures to monitor and assess the group’s financial performance. These measures include a combination of 
statutory measures calculated in accordance with IFRS and alternative performance measures. The alternative performance measures 
represent the equivalent IFRS measures but are adjusted to exclude items that management considers would prevent comparison of the 
group’s performance both from one reporting period to another and with other similar businesses. Management believes that these 
alternative performance measures provide useful additional information about the group’s performance and are consistent with how the 
business performance is measured internally by the chief decision maker. 
The classification of items excluded from profit before adjusting items requires judgment including consideration of the nature, 
circumstances, scale and impact of transaction. The group’s definition of items excluded, together with further details of adjustments made, 
is provided within the accounting policy section, note 2. 
Determining the lease term of contracts with renewal and termination options – Group as Lessee 
The group determines the lease term as the non-cancellable term of the lease, together with any periods covered by an option to extend 
the lease if it is reasonably certain to be exercised, or any periods covered by an option to terminate the lease, if it is reasonably certain 
not to be exercised. 
The group has several lease contracts that include extension and termination options. The group applied judgement in evaluating whether 
it is reasonably certain whether or not to exercise the option to renew or terminate the lease. That is, it considers all relevant factors 
that create an economic incentive for it to exercise either the renewal or termination. After the commencement date, the group 
reassesses the lease term if there is a significant event or change in circumstances that is within its controls and affects its ability to 
exercise or not to exercise the option to renew or to terminate. The total potential effect of these clauses has been disclosed in note 
20. 
Key sources of estimation uncertainty 
The areas of estimation that have a significant risk of resulting in material adjustments to carrying amounts of assets and liabilities are 
detailed below: 
Impairment of property, plant and equipment, intangible assets and right-of-use assets 
IFRS requires management to perform impairment tests annually for indefinite lived assets (Goodwill), and for finite lived as sets 
(property, plant and equipment, right-of-use assets and other intangible assets), if events or changes in circumstances indicate that 
their carrying amounts may not be recoverable. 
Impairment testing requires management to judge whether the carrying value of assets can be supported by the net present value of 
future cash flows that they generate. Calculating the net present value of the future cash flows requires estimates to be made in respect 
of short-term and long-term growth rates, and the adoption of a suitable discount rate. Short-term growth rates are based on the board 
approved strategic plan. The long-term growth rate has been based on expected industry returns which is slightly below the forecast 
long-term UK inflation rate. The discount rate is based on the group’s WACC and is applied across all reporting segments as risk factors 
are considered to be similar. 

59 Strategic Report | Corporate Governance | Financial Statements 
 
Changes to the growth rate or discount rate used, could significantly affect the group's impairment charge (and reversal) recognised in 
the income statement and the overall value of assets held at the balance sheet date. Management has provided analysis of the sensitivity 
to these assumptions in note 11. 
The cashflows used in the impairment exercise have been aligned to the group’s 5-year strategic plan. Further details are provided in 
notes 11 and 20. 
Taxation 
The group’s tax charge is the sum of the total current and deferred tax charges. The calculation of the group’s tax charge involves estimation 
and judgment in respect of following items: 
Recognition of deferred tax asset and liabilities 
The group has exercised significant accounting estimation and judgment in the recognition of deferred tax liabilities in respect of property, 
plant and equipment. Significant accounting estimates and judgements include those used to determine the amount of net book value of 
property, plant and equipment to which the initial recognition exemption applies, the calculation of the tax base on sale (which is subject 
to certain restrictions under tax law) and the offsetting of inherent losses against inherent gains where tax losses are expected to be 
utilised against future profits and gains. 
Corporate Interest Restriction 
The following significant judgements and estimates have been used to calculate the current and deferred tax balances relating to 
Corporate Interest Restriction: 
 
- 
As statutory accounts are not prepared for the Greene King group subsidiaries at the time of the Greene King Limited group 
consolidated accounts being prepared, the Greene King Limited group accounts have been used to estimate Net Tax Interest Expense 
and Tax EBITDA on an entity basis; 
 
- 
As Greene King is part of the wider CK group following the 2019 acquisition, the Corporate Interest Restriction is calculated across 
the CKA group. The Greene King accounts rely on estimates provided by CKA, CKA’s assertions that the group should calculate 
the Corporate Interest Restriction using the Fixed Ratio methodology and that the group should not suffer restrictions that arise 
outside of the Greene King group, but in the CKA group. 
Pension liabilities 
Management uses estimates when determining the group's liabilities and expenses arising for defined benefit pension schemes.  
The present values of pension liabilities are determined on an actuarial basis and depend on actuarial assumptions. Key assumptions have 
been identified as the discount rate adopted, implied inflation rate and assumed life expectancy. Any change in these assumptions will 
impact on the carrying amount of pension liabilities, with further details on assumptions adopted and related sensitivity disclosed in note 
8. 
The group has determined that when all members have left the scheme, any surplus remaining would be returned to the company in 
accordance with the trust deed. As such the full economic benefit of the surplus under IAS 19 is deemed available to the company and is 
recognised in the balance sheet. 
 
2 ACCOUNTING POLICIES 
Property, plant and equipment 
Property, plant and equipment is stated at cost or deemed cost on transition to IFRS, less accumulated depreciation and any impairment 
in value. 
Depreciation is calculated on a straight-line basis over the estimated useful life of the asset. 
Freehold land is not depreciated. Freehold and long leasehold buildings are depreciated to their estimated residual values over periods 
up to 50 years, and short leasehold improvements are depreciated to their estimated residual values over the shorter of the remaining 
term of the lease or useful life of the asset. 
There is no depreciable amount if residual value is the same as, or exceeds, book value. 
Plant and equipment assets are depreciated over their estimated lives which range from 3 to 20 years. 
Residual values, useful lives and methods of depreciation are reviewed for all categories of property, plant and equipment and adjusted, 
if appropriate, at each financial year end. 
An item of property, plant and equipment is derecognised upon disposal or when no future economic benefits are expected from its use. 
Profit or loss on derecognition is calculated as the difference between the net disposal proceeds and the carrying amount of the asset 
and is included in the income statement in the year of derecognition. 
Intangible assets 
Brand intangibles 
Brand intangible assets recognised on acquisition are amortised on a straight-line basis over their estimated useful lives (15 years) within 
operating costs. The carrying value is reviewed annually for impairment, with any impairment losses recognised in the income statement. 
Investment property 
Investment property is initially measured at cost and subsequently at fair value with any change therein recognised in profit or loss. Rental 
income from investment property is recognised as “other services” (note 3) on a straight-line basis over the term of the lease.  

60 
Business combinations and goodwill 
Business combinations are accounted for using the acquisition method. The cost of an acquisition is measured as the aggregate of the 
consideration  transferred, measured at acquisition date fair value, and the amount of any non-controlling interest in the acquiree. The 
choice of measurement of non-controlling interests, either at fair value or at the proportionate share of the acquiree's identifiable net 
assets, is determined on a transaction-by-transaction basis. Acquisition costs incurred are taken to the income statement. 
 
The group has an option to apply a ‘concentration test’ that permits a simplified assessment of whether an acquired set of activities and 
assets is not a business. The optional concentration test is met if substantially all of the fair value of the gross assets acquired is 
concentrated in a single identifiable asset or group of similar identifiable assets. 
When the group acquires a business, it assesses the financial assets acquired and liabilities assumed for appropriate classification and 
designation in accordance with the contractual terms, economic circumstances and pertinent conditions as at the acquisition date. This 
includes the separation of embedded derivatives in host contracts of the acquiree. 
 
Any contingent consideration to be transferred to the vendor is recognised at fair value at the acquisition date. Subsequent changes to 
the fair value of the contingent consideration which are deemed to be an asset or a liability are recognised in the income statement. 
If the contingent consideration is classified as equity, it is not remeasured until it is finally settled within equity. 
 
Goodwill is initially measured at cost being the excess of the aggregate of the acquisition date fair value of the consideration transferred 
and the amount recognised for the non-controlling interest over the net identifiable amounts of the assets acquired and liabilities assumed 
in exchange for the business combination. Assets acquired and liabilities assumed in transactions separate to the business combinations, 
such as the settlement of pre-existing relationships or post-acquisition remuneration arrangements, are accounted for separately from 
the business combination in accordance with their nature and applicable IFRS. Identifiable intangible assets, meeting either the contractual-
legal or separability criteria, are recognised separately from goodwill. Contingent liabilities representing a present obligation are 
recognised if the acquisition date fair value can be measured reliably. 
 
If the aggregate of the acquisition date fair value of the consideration transferred and the amount recognised for the non-controlling 
interest is lower than the fair value of the assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities and the fair value of any pre-existing interest held in 
the business acquired, the difference is recognised in the income statement.  
After initial recognition, goodwill is measured at cost less any accumulated impairment losses.  
 
Where goodwill forms part of a cash-generating unit and part of the operation within that unit is disposed of, any goodwill associated 
with the operation disposed of is included in the carrying amount of the operation when determining the gain or loss on disposal of the 
operation. Goodwill disposed of in this circumstance is measured based on the relative values of the operation disposed of and the 
portion of the cash-generating unit retained.  
Impairment 
Property, plant and equipment and Right-of-use assets 
Individual assets are grouped for impairment assessment purposes at the lowest level at which there are identifiable cash inflows 
independent of the cash inflows of other groups of assets. For this purpose, this has been identified as individual sites.  
An assessment is made at each reporting date as to whether there is an indication of impairment. If an indication exists, the group makes 
an estimate of the recoverable amount of each cash-generating unit (CGU). An asset's or cash-generating unit's recoverable amount is 
the higher of its fair value less costs of disposal and value in use and is determined for an individual asset, unless the asset does not 
generate cash inflows that are largely independent of those from other assets or groups of assets.  
 
An impairment loss is recognised where the recoverable amount is lower than the carrying value of assets. If there is an indication that 
any previously recognised impairment losses may no longer exist or may have decreased, a reversal of the loss may be made only if there 
has been a change in the estimates used to determine the recoverable amounts since the last impairment loss was recognised. The 
carrying amount of the asset is increased to its recoverable amount only up to the carrying amount that would have resulted, net of 
depreciation, had no impairment loss been recognised for the asset in prior periods.  
 
Impairment losses and any subsequent reversals are recognised in the income statement as adjusting items within operating costs. 
Details of the impairment losses recognised in respect of property, plant and equipment are provided in note 11 and right-of-use assets 
in note 20. 
 
Goodwill 
Goodwill is reviewed for impairment annually or more frequently if events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying value 
may be impaired. 
For the purpose of impairment testing, goodwill acquired in a business combination is, from the acquisition date, allocated to each of the 
group’s cash-generating units (or groups of cash-generating units) that are expected to benefit from the combination, irrespective of 
whether other assets or liabilities of the acquiree are assigned to those units. Each unit or group of units to which goodwill is allocated 
represents the lowest level within the group at which goodwill is monitored for internal management purposes and cannot be larger than 
an operating segment before aggregation. 
Impairment is determined by the recoverable amount of an operating segment. Where this is less than the carrying value of the operating 
segment, an impairment loss is recognised immediately in the income statement. This loss cannot be reversed in future periods. 
Financial instruments  
Financial instruments are recognised when the group becomes party to the contractual provisions of the instrument and are derecognised 
when the group no longer controls the contractual rights that comprise the financial instrument, normally through sale or when all cash 
flows attributable to the instrument are passed to an independent third party. 
 

61 Strategic Report | Corporate Governance | Financial Statements 
 
Classification, measurement and impairment 
Financial assets 
The classification of financial assets at initial recognition depends on the financial asset’s contractual cash flow characteristics and the 
group’s business model for managing them. With the exception of trade receivables that do not contain a significant financing component, 
the group initially measures a financial asset at its fair value plus, in the case of a financial asset not at fair value through profit or loss, 
transaction costs. Trade receivables that do not contain a significant financing component are measured at transaction price determined 
under IFRS 15. 
Subsequently, the group classifies its financial assets as measured at: 
– 
amortised cost; 
– 
fair value through other comprehensive income; or 
– 
fair value through profit or loss 
The classification depends on the financial asset’s contractual cash flow characteristics and the group’s business model for managing them. 
The group’s financial assets measured at amortised cost include trade loans, trade receivables and cash and cash equivalents. 
Other financial assets are trade loans to publicans who purchase the group’s beer and liquor. Trade loans that are held for the collection 
of contractual cash flows and the cash flows received from them are solely payments of principal, and interest on the principal amount 
outstanding is subsequently carried at amortised cost using the effective interest method. The amortised cost is reduced by impairment 
losses. 
Interest revenue on the trade loans is recognised in the income statement. Any gain or loss on derecognition is recognised in the income 
statement. There will be derecognition of trade loans when the group has no reasonable expectation of recovering the financial asset in 
its entirety or a portion thereof. 
For financial assets held at amortised cost, an estimate of a 12-month expected credit losses (ECLs) are recognised as an impairment 
provision upon recognition of a new free trade loan; and at each reporting date, an assessment is made to determine if there has been a 
significant increase in credit risk since initial recognition. In cases where this is evident or is determined to be credit impaired, lifetime 
expected credit losses are used as the basis for the impairment provision, otherwise the group measures the loss allowance for the 
financial asset at an amount equal to a 12-month expected credit loss. 
Lifetime expected credit loss represents the expected credit losses that will result from all possible default events over the expected life 
of a financial instrument. In turn, 12-month expected credit loss represents the portion of lifetime expected credit losses that is expected 
to result from default events on a financial instrument that are possible within 12-months after the reporting date. 
Trade receivables 
Trade receivables are amounts due from customers for goods sold or services performed in the ordinary course of business. Trade 
receivables are recognised initially at the amount of consideration that is unconditional unless they contain significant financing 
components, when they are recognised at fair value. The group holds trade receivables with the objective to collect the contractual cash 
flows and therefore measures them subsequently at amortised cost using the effective interest method. 
 
For trade receivables, the group adopts a simplified approach in calculating expected credit losses. Therefore, the group does not track 
changes in credit risk but instead recognises a loss allowance based on lifetime ECLs at each reporting date. The group utilises a provision 
matrix that has been designed based on historically observed default rates adjusted by a forward-looking estimate that includes the 
probability of a worsening economic environment within the next year. 
 
The group assesses a financial asset in default when contractual payments are 90 days past due. A financial asset is written off when there 
is no reasonable expectation of recovering the contractual cash flows. 
 
Details about the group's calculation of the loss allowance are provided in note 22. 
 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Cash and cash equivalents in the balance sheet comprise cash at bank and in hand and short-term deposits with an original maturity of three 
months or less. For the consolidated cash flow statement, cash and cash equivalents consist of cash and cash equivalents as defined above, 
net of outstanding bank overdrafts. 
Financial liabilities 
The group classifies all financial liabilities as subsequently measured at amortised cost, except for derivatives that are subsequently 
measured at fair value. 
Interest-bearing loans and borrowings 
All loans and borrowings are initially recognised at fair value of the consideration received, net of issue costs. After initial recognition, interest- 
bearing loans and borrowings are measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method. 
Trade payables 
Trade payables are non-interest bearing and are stated at their nominal value. 
Derivative financial instruments and hedge accounting 
The group uses interest rate swaps to hedge its exposure to interest rate fluctuations on its variable rate loans, notes and bonds. 
Interest rate swaps are initially measured at fair value, if any, and carried on the balance sheet as an asset if a fair value is positive or liability 
if a fair value is negative. The carrying amount of a derivative is split between current and non-current portions. The present value of the 

62 
net interest cash flows of a swap for the forthcoming twelve months after the reporting date is presented as current asset if fair value is 
positive or current liability if fair value is negative. The remainder portion of a carrying amount is presented as non-current asset or 
liability if the remaining maturity of the instrument is more than twelve months and it is not expected to be realised or settled within 
twelve months. Subsequent measurement is at fair value and the movement is recognised in the income statement unless hedge accounting 
is adopted. For interest rate swaps where hedge accounting is not applied, gains or losses arising from changes in the clean fair value are 
presented in the income statement in the period in which they arise. 
Hedge accounting 
To qualify for hedge accounting the hedge relationship must be designated and documented at inception. Documentation must include 
the group's risk management objective and strategy for undertaking the hedge and formal allocation to the item or transaction being 
hedged. The group also documents how it will assess the effectiveness of the hedge and carries out assessments through periodic 
prospective effectiveness testing to ensure that: 
- there is an economic relationship between the hedged item and the hedging instrument; 
- the effect of credit risk does not dominate the value changes that result from the economic relationship; and 
- the hedge ratio is the same as that resulting from actual quantities of hedged items and hedging instruments used for risk 
management 
Hedges can be classified as either fair value (hedging exposure to changes in fair value of an asset or liability), or cash flow (hedging the 
variability in cash flows attributable to an asset, liability or forecast transaction). The group uses certain of its interest rate swaps as cash 
flow hedges. 
Cash flow hedge accounting 
The effective portion of the gain or loss on an interest rate swap is recognised in Other comprehensive income (OCI), whilst any 
ineffective portion is recognised immediately in the income statement. 
Amounts recognised in OCI are transferred to the income statement in the same period that the financial income or expense is 
recognised, unless the hedged transaction results in the recognition of a non-financial asset or liability whereby the amounts are 
transferred to the initial carrying amount of the asset or liability. 
When a hedging instrument expires or is sold, terminated or exercised, or no longer qualifies for hedge accounting, amounts previously 
recognised in OCI are held there until the previously hedged transaction affects the income statement. If the hedged transaction is no 
longer expected to occur, the cumulative gain or loss recognised in OCI is immediately transferred to the income statement. 
Employee Benefits 
Short-term employee benefits are expensed as the related service is provided. A liability is recognised for the amount expected to be 
paid if the group has a present legal or constructive obligation to pay this amount as a result of past service provided by the employee 
and the obligation can be estimated reliably. 
Finance costs and income 
Finance costs are expensed to the income statement using the effective interest method. Finance income is recognised in the income 
statement using the effective interest method. 
Inventories 
Inventories are valued at the lower of cost and net realisable value. Cost comprises direct materials and, where applicable, direct labour 
costs and those overheads that have been incurred in bringing the inventories to their present location and condition. Cost is calculated 
using the weighted average method.  
At the reporting date, inventories are assessed for impairment. If inventories are impaired, the carrying amount is reduced to its selling 
price less costs to complete and sell. The impairment loss is recognised immediately in the Statement of Comprehensive Income. 
Property, plant and equipment held for sale 
Property, plant and equipment is classified as held for sale only if it is available for sale in its current condition, management is committed 
to the sale and a sale is highly probable and expected to be completed within one year from the date of classification. Property, plant and 
equipment classified as held for sale is measured at the lower of carrying amount and fair value less costs of disposal and is no longer 
depreciated or amortised. 
Provisions 
Provisions are recognised when the group has a present legal or constructive obligation as a result of a past event, when it is probable 
that an outflow of resources will be required to settle the obligation, and when a reliable estimate can be made of the amount of the 
obligation. 
Provisions are discounted to present value, where the effect of the time value of money is material, using a pre-tax discount rate that 
reflects current market estimates of the time value of money and the risks specific to the liability. The unwinding of the discount is 
recognised as a finance cost. 
Pensions and other post-employment benefits 
Defined benefit pension schemes 
The group operates two defined benefit pension schemes which require contributions to be made into separately administered funds. 
The cost of providing benefits under the schemes is determined separately for each plan using the projected unit credit actuarial method 
on an annual basis. Remeasurement gains and losses are recognised in full in the group statement of comprehensive income in the period 

63 Strategic Report | Corporate Governance | Financial Statements 
 
in which they occur. 
 
When a settlement or curtailment occurs the obligation and related scheme assets are remeasured, and the resulting gain or loss is 
recognised in the income statement in the same period.  
Net interest on the net defined benefit liability/(asset) is determined by multiplying the net defined benefit liability/(asset) by the discount 
rate both as determined at the start of the annual reporting period, taking account of any changes in the net defined benefit liability/(asset) 
during the period as a result of contributions and benefit payments. 
 
The defined benefit asset or liability recognised in the balance sheet comprises the present value of the schemes' obligations less the fair 
value of scheme assets. Any surplus resulting from this calculation is limited to the present value of any economic benefits available in the 
form of refunds from the schemes.  
Defined contribution pension schemes 
Contributions to the group’s defined contribution pension schemes are charged to the income statement as they become payable. 
Revenue 
Generally, revenue represents external sales (excluding taxes) of goods and services, net of discounts. Revenue is recognised to the extent 
that it is probable that the economic benefits will flow to the group and is measured at the fair value of consideration receivable, excluding 
discounts, rebates, and other sales taxes or duty relating to brewing and packaging of certain products. 
The group does not expect to have any contracts where the period between the transfer of the promised goods or services to the customer 
and payment by the customer exceeds one year. As a consequence, the group does not adjust any of the transaction prices for the time 
value of money. 
Greene King pubs and Destination Brands 
Food and drink 
Revenue is recognised at the point at which food and drinks are provided based on till receipts taken in our licensed estate. Promotional 
discounts are recorded at point of sale. Revenue is reported on product sales net of VAT and discounts applied. 
The performance obligation is satisfied upon the delivery of the food and drink, and payment of the transaction price is due immediately 
when the customer purchases the food and/or drink. 
Other services 
Accommodation revenue is recognised on a daily basis based on occupancy at the agreed price (net of discount and VAT). The 
performance obligation is satisfied at the point the service is provided, and payment is generally due at the end of the guest stay at the 
accommodation. 
Gaming machine income is recognised, in the group’s capacity as agent, where net takings are recognised as earned on the group’s 
proportion of gaming machine proceeds in the period of sale. 
 
Partnerships & Ventures   
Food and drink 
Revenue is recognised at the point at which food and drinks are provided based on till receipts taken in our licensed estate. Promotional 
discounts are recorded at point of sale. Revenue is reported on product sales net of VAT and discounts applied. 
The performance obligation is satisfied upon the delivery of the food and drink, and payment of the transaction price is due immediately 
when the customer purchases the food and/or drink. 
Other services 
Accommodation revenue is recognised on a daily basis based on occupancy at the agreed price (net of discount and VAT). The 
performance obligation is satisfied at the point the service is provided, and payment is generally due at the end of the guest stay at the 
accommodation. 
Gaming machine income is recognised, in the group’s capacity as agent, where net takings are recognised as earned on the group’s 
proportion of gaming machine proceeds in the period of sale. 
 
Drink/product sales to leased and tenanted pubs 
 
 
The group supplies tenants with a variety of products recognising the sale upon delivery to the pub. At this point the tenant is solely 
responsible for stock management and no refunds are given for out-of-date products, passing all risks and rewards of ownership to the 
tenant. 
 
The tenancy agreement may also include volume incentives in the form of retros, which are deemed to be related transactions and 
therefore the cost of retro is recognised simultaneously, provided that the cost can be measured reliably. The net of the proceeds from 
sale and the expected retro is disclosed as revenue. The accrued value for rebates payable is included within other payables. 
 
Rental income  
 
The group recognises rental income on a straight-line basis over the term of the lease, as the performance obligation is satisfied over 
time, based on the contractual terms of the lease agreement. 
 
 
Gaming machine income 

64 
 
Gaming machine income is recognised, in the group's capacity as agent, where net takings are recognised as earned on the group's 
proportion of gaming machine proceeds in the period of sale. 
 
Franchise arrangements  
The group has a number of franchise arrangements with its tenants, where the group controls the goods and services before they are 
transferred to the customer and accordingly revenue is recognised gross by the group.  
 
Brewing & Brands 
 
Brewing & Brands drink revenue is recognised upon delivery date, net of VAT and duty and discounts applied. Export revenue is 
recognised on export sales based on the invoice date. Products are shipped on a 'free on board' basis, with risk and rewards of ownership 
being transferred, and performance obligation satisfied, from the group upon shipment rather than the receipt by the customer. The 
export revenue is immaterial to the group therefore no information about geographical regions has been provided as the group's activities 
are predominantly domestic. 
 
Supplier rebates 
 
 
Supplier rebates are included within operating profit as they are earned as there is no significant uncertainty. The accrued value at the 
reporting date is included within other receivables. Other receivables are recognised at fair value.  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Leases 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Group as lessee 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
For any new contracts entered into, the group considers whether a contract is or contains a lease. A lease is defined as 'a contract, or 
part of a contract, that conveys the right to use an asset for a period of time in exchange for consideration'. To apply this definition, the 
group assesses whether the contract meets all of the following criteria: 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
- the contract contains an identified asset, which is either explicitly identified in the contact or implicitly specified by being identified 
at the time the asset is made available to the group 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
- the group has the right to obtain substantially all of the economic benefits from use of the identified asset throughout the period 
of use, considering its rights within the defined scope of the contract 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
- the group has the right to direct the use of the identified asset throughout the period of use. The group assesses whether it has 
the right to direct 'how and for what purpose' the asset is used throughout the period of use. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Leases are recognised as a right-of-use asset and a corresponding lease liability at the date at which the leased asset is available for use 
by the group.  Each lease payment is allocated between repayment of the lease liability and finance cost. The finance cost is charged to 
the income statement over the lease term to produce a constant periodic rate of interest on the outstanding lease liability balance. The 
right-of-use asset is depreciated over the shorter of the asset’s expected useful life and the lease term on a straight-line basis unless the 
lease is expected to transfer ownership of the underlying asset to the group in which case the asset is depreciated to the end of the 
useful life of the asset. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
The lease liability is initially measured as the present value of future lease payments, discounted using the interest rate implicit in the 
lease. Where this rate is not determinable, the incremental borrowing rate is used, which is the interest rate the entity would have to 
pay to borrow the amount necessary to obtain an asset of similar value, in a similar economic environment with similar terms and 
conditions. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
The right-of-use asset is initially measured at cost, comprising the initial value of the lease liability, any lease payments made (net of any 
incentives received from the lessor) before the commencement of the lease, any initial direct costs and any restoration costs. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
For changes to existing contracts such as fair market rent reviews or other modifications, a remeasurement is recorded in both right-
of-use asset and lease liability based upon the  net present value of the incremental change of cashflows discounted at the IBR. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Right of use assets (ROUA) are measured at either: 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
- their carrying amount as if IFRS 16 had been applied since the lease commencement date, discounted by the group's 
incremental borrowing rate as at 29 April 2019. The group has applied this methodology to the majority of its 
property leases where sufficient historical information has been available to facilitate this.  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
- An amount equal to the lease liability, adjusted by the amount of any prepaid or accrued lease payments. This has 
been applied to a small number of property leases where it was not possible to ascertain sufficient historical data to 
enable a retrospective calculation. This method has also been applied to the group’s other assets.  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Each right-of-use asset is depreciated over the shorter of its useful life and the lease term on a straight-line basis unless the 
lease is expected to transfer ownership of the underlying asset to the group in which case the asset is depreciated to the end 
of the useful life of the asset. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Payments in respect of leases of either short-term, low-value or based on variable rental payments continue to be charged to the income 
statement on a straight-line basis over the lease term. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Group as lessor 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Leases in which the group does not transfer substantially all the risks and rewards incidental to ownership of an asset are classified as 
operating leases. Rental income arising is accounted for on a straight-line basis over the lease terms and is included in revenue in the 
statement of profit or loss due to its operating nature. Initial direct costs incurred in negotiating and arranging an operating lease are 

65 Strategic Report | Corporate Governance | Financial Statements 
 
added to the carrying amount of the leased asset and recognised over the lease term on the same basis as rental income. Contingent 
rents are recognised as revenue in the period in which they are earned. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Leases for which the group is a lessor are classified as operating leases.  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Merger reserve 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
The merger reserve represents capital contributions received, and amounts recognised on the acquisition of Spirit Pub Company Limited 
being the difference between the value of the consideration and the nominal value of the shares issued as consideration. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Taxes 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Income tax 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
The income tax charge comprises both the income tax payable based on profits for the period and the deferred income tax. It is calculated 
using taxation rates enacted or substantively enacted by the balance sheet date and is measured at the amount expected to be recovered 
from or paid to the taxation authorities. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Income tax relating to items recognised in OCI and equity are recognised in OCI and equity respectively. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Deferred tax 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Deferred tax is provided for using the liability method on temporary differences at the balance sheet date between the tax bases of assets 
and liabilities and their carrying values in the financial statements.  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Deferred tax is recognised for all temporary differences except where the deferred tax arises from the initial recognition of goodwill 
(for taxable temporary differences) or of an asset or liability in a transaction that is not a business combination that, at the time of the 
transaction, affects neither the accounting profit nor taxable profit or loss or, in respect of taxable temporary differences associated with 
investments in subsidiaries, where the timing of the reversal of the temporary differences can be controlled and it is probable that the 
temporary differences will not reverse in the foreseeable future.  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Deferred tax assets are recognised for all deductible temporary differences and carry forward of unused tax losses only to the extent 
that it is probable that taxable profit will be available against which the deductible temporary differences and the carry forward of unused 
tax losses can be utilised. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
The carrying amount of deferred tax assets is reviewed at each balance sheet date and reduced to the extent that it is no longer probable 
that sufficient taxable profit will be available to allow all or part of the deferred tax asset to be utilised. Unrecognised deferred tax assets 
are reassessed at each balance sheet date and are recognised to the extent that it has become probable that future taxable profit will 
allow the deferred tax asset to be recovered.  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Deferred tax assets and liabilities are measured, on an undiscounted basis, at the tax rates that are expected to apply to the period when 
the asset is realised or the liability is settled, based on tax rates that have been enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet 
date. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Deferred tax assets and deferred tax liabilities are offset when there is a legally enforceable right to offset income tax assets and income 
tax liabilities, and they relate to the same taxable entity and same tax authority and when it is the intention to settle the balances on a 
net basis. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Deferred tax relating to items recognised in OCI and equity are recognised in OCI and equity respectively.  
 
 
 
 
 
Uncertain tax positions 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
A current tax provision is recognised when the group has a present obligation as a result of a past event, and it is probable that the group 
will be required to settle that obligation. Tax benefits are not recognised unless it is probable that the benefit will be obtained, and tax 
provisions are made if it is probable that a liability will arise. The group reviews its uncertain tax positions each period in order to 
determine the appropriate accounting treatment. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Adjusting items and adjusted profitability measures 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Management uses a range of measures to monitor and assess the group’s financial performance. These measures include a combination 
of statutory measures calculated in accordance with IFRS and alternative performance measures (APMs). The income statement includes 
the following adjusted measures of profitability: 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
- 
Adjusted operating profit/loss; 
- 
Adjusted finance costs and; 
- 
Adjusted tax.  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Management believes that APMs provide useful additional information about the group’s performance, and these are used by management 
internally.  
  
 
 
These measures represent the equivalent IFRS measures but are adjusted to exclude items that management considers would prevent 
comparison of the group’s performance both from one reporting period to another and with other similar businesses. Adjusting items 
are not defined under IFRS. Adjusting items are classified as those which are separately identifiable by virtue of their size, nature or 
expected frequency and therefore warrant separate presentation or allow a better understanding of the underlying performance of the 
business. Presentation of these measures are not intended to be a substitute for or intended to promote them above statutory measures. 

66 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
The group’s income statement provides a reconciliation of the adjusted profitability measures, excluding adjusting items to the equivalent 
unadjusted IFRS measures. Adjusting items are then further detailed in note 5 to the financial statements. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Items that are considered to be adjusting and that are therefore separately identified in order to aid comparability may include the 
following: 
 
- 
profits or losses resulting from the disposal of a business or investment; 
 
 
 
 
- 
costs incurred in association with business combinations, such as legal and professional fees and stamp duty, that 
are excluded from the fair value of the consideration of the business combination; 
 
 
 
- 
one-off restructuring and integration costs that are incurred either following a business combination or following a 
restructuring of the group’s support functions. These costs can be significant and would prevent year-on-year 
comparability of the group’s trading if not separately identified; 
 
 
 
 
 
- 
impairment charges/(reversals) in respect of tangible and intangible assets; 
 
 
 
 
- 
one-off past services charges in relation to guaranteed minimum pension benefits; 
 
- 
revaluation (gain)/losses on investment property; 
- 
accelerated depreciation on assets and dual running costs; 
 
 
 
- 
finance costs or income resulting from gains or losses upon the settlement of interest rate swap and bond liabilities 
and from cumulative gains or losses recycled in full to the income statement where the swaps have been terminated. 
These amounts may be significant and are separately identified as the instruments they relate to would no longer 
form part of the group’s ongoing capital structure; 
 
 
 
 
 
 
- 
fair value gains and losses on the ineffective element of cash flow hedges and fair value movements in respect of 
derivatives not qualified for hedge accounting. Such items are separately presented as movements may be both 
significant and volatile. 
- 
significant and/or one-off tax settlements in respect of prior periods (including any related interest), and the tax 
impact of the items identified above and movements on the licensed estate are included as adjusting items. These 
items are separately identified to allow management and investors to separately understand tax charges relating to 
in-year ongoing activity and what relates to prior periods; 
 
 
 
 
 
- 
one-off costs relating to the outbreak of a pandemic, to include the costs of write off of obsolete stock, increase in 
the expected credit loss of trade debtors and free trade loans, and other costs or reversals directly attributable to 
either the closure of pubs during the outbreak period or preparing the sites for reopening; 
 
 
- 
employee costs and other legal and professional fees incurred in relation to restructuring cost associated with 
changes to management, group refinancing activities and defending uncertain tax positions; 
 
 
- 
profit or loss on the disposal of property, plant and equipment, where the group disposes of properties that it no 
longer considers meet the ongoing needs of the business. These profits or losses could be significant and volatile 
and are not reflective of the group’s ongoing trading results; 
 
 
 
 
 
- 
gains or losses resulting from the settlement of liabilities in respect of the group’s pension schemes; 
 
- 
insurance compensation received to meet the costs of restoring sites damaged by fire. Such compensation may be 
receivable over a lengthy time period and be of a large total amount; 
 
 
 
 
- 
the impact of changes in the statutory tax rates; 
 
 
 
 
 
 
- 
the impact of changes to the tax base cost of group’s licensed estate and indexation; and 
 
 
- 
other adjustments in respect of prior periods' tax arising from finalising the tax returns for earlier periods and 
rolled over gains on the licensed estate.  
 
 
 

67 Strategic Report | Corporate Governance | Financial Statements 
 
3 SEGMENT INFORMATION 
The group has four reportable segments which are based on the information presented to the Chief Executive Officer, who is considered 
to be the chief operating decision maker. No aggregation of segments has been performed. The four segments are largely organised and 
managed separately according to the nature of products and services provided, distribution channels and profile of customers. The 
segments include the following businesses: 
Greene King pubs: Wet and food-led managed pubs  
Destination Brands: Food-led managed pubs 
Partnerships & Ventures: Leased, tenanted, franchised pubs and venture businesses. Venture businesses include managed pubs, hotels 
and restaurants.  
Brewing & Brands: Brewing, marketing and selling beer. Revenue disclosed is solely in relation to third parties. 
 
 
Greene King 
pubs  
Destination 
Brands 
Partnerships 
& Ventures 
Brewing & 
Brands 
Corporate 
Total
operations
52 weeks to 29 December 2024 
£m 
 £m 
£m 
£m 
£m 
£m 
Revenue 
Analysed as:  
Goods 
966.5 
799.2 
447.0 
237.8 
- 
2,450.5
– Drink 
656.8 
330.3 
249.2 
237.8 
- 
1,474.1
– Food 
277.0 
428.9 
123.7 
- 
- 
829.6
933.8 
759.2 
372.9 
237.8 
- 
2,303.7
Services 
– Other services1 
 
32.7 
 
40.0 
 
74.1 
 
- 
 
- 
146.8
Adjusted EBITDA2 
192.9 
88.1 
112.2 
31.2 
(71.4) 
353.0
Adjusted operating profit/(loss) 
135.7 
  44.4 
83.2 
19.4 
(84.7) 
198.0 
Adjusting operating items 
(15.5) 
(155.9) 
(36.1) 
(1.3) 
(5.6) 
(214.4)
Lease interest 
(11.9) 
(5.4) 
(2.0) 
(1.4) 
(2.1) 
(22.8)
Net finance costs 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
(107.9)
Income tax charge 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
(9.2)
Segment (loss)/profit3 
108.3 
(116.9) 
45.1 
16.7 
(92.4) 
(156.3)
 
Greene King 
pubs  
Destination 
Brands 
Partnerships 
& Ventures 
Brewing & 
Brands 
Corporate 
Total 
operations 
52 weeks to 31 December 2023 
£m 
£m 
£m 
£m 
£m 
£m 
Revenue 
Analysed as:  
Goods 
938.4 
787.4 
420.9 
228.7 
- 
2,375.4 
– Drink 
638.6 
330.7 
235.7 
228.7 
- 
1,433.7 
– Food 
267.5 
416.1 
109.3 
- 
- 
792.9 
906.1 
746.8 
345.0 
228.7 
- 
2,226.6 
Services 
– Other services1 
 
32.3 
 
40.6 
 
75.9 
 
- 
 
- 
 
148.8 
Adjusted EBITDA2 
176.0 
90.3 
106.0 
32.2 
(75.3) 
329.2 
Adjusted operating profit/(loss) 
121.7 
         47.5 
78.3 
21.3 
(82.7) 
186.1 
Adjusting operating items 
10.8 
4.3 
(33.0) 
(0.3) 
(0.7) 
(18.9) 
Lease interest 
(12.0) 
(4.8) 
(2.3) 
(1.5) 
(1.0) 
(21.6) 
Net finance costs 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
(100.4) 
Income tax charge 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
(5.1) 
Segment profit/(loss)3 
120.5 
47.0 
43.0 
19.5 
(84.4) 
40.1 
1. Other services include accommodation, rental and gaming machine income. 
2. Adjusted EBITDA represents earnings before interest, tax, depreciation, amortisation and adjusting items and is reconciled on page 106.  
3. Segment profit/(loss) for the trading divisions represents operating profit after lease interest. For the corporate division segment loss represents operating loss after net 
finance costs and income tax charge.  
Revenue from services includes rent receivable from licensed properties of £50.1m (prior period: £49.4m). 
During the year management announced changes to the structure of the group’s internal organisation, and as a result, the composition 
of the group’s reporting segments changed from the start of FY25. Partnerships and Ventures will no longer be a standalone division and 
the group moved from four divisions to three: Greene King pubs; Destination Brands and Ventures; and Brewing and Brands.  
Management reporting and controlling systems 
Management monitors the operating results of its segments separately for the purpose of making decisions about allocating resources and 
assessing performance. Segment performance is measured based on segment adjusted operating profit or loss referred to as trading 

68 
profit in the group’s management and reporting systems. Inter-segment revenues and costs are eliminated upon consolidation and hence 
excluded from the segmental information above. Included within the corporate column in the table above are functions managed by a central 
division. 
No information about geographical regions has been provided as the group’s activities are predominantly domestic. 
 
4 OPERATING COSTS 
Operating profit is stated after charging/(crediting): 
52 weeks 
 29 December 2024 
52 weeks 
31 December 2023 
 
 
Before 
adjusting 
items 
Adjusting 
items 
Total 
Before 
adjusting 
items 
Adjusting 
items 
Total 
£m 
£m 
£m 
£m 
£m 
£m 
Cost of products sold recognised as an expense 
680.3 
- 
680.3 
682.7 
- 
682.7 
Employment costs (note 6) 
801.1 
11.7 
812.8 
775.4 
- 
775.4 
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment (note 11) 
114.6 
1.0 
115.6 
104.0 
- 
104.0 
Revaluation of investment property (note 12) 
- 
(0.3) 
(0.3)
- 
(1.6) 
(1.6) 
Depreciation of right-of-use assets (note 20) 
38.9 
- 
38.9 
37.5 
- 
37.5 
Amortisation (note 10) 
1.5 
- 
1.5 
1.6 
- 
1.6 
Net impairment charge of property, plant, and equipment (note 
11), right-of-use assets (note 20) and goodwill (note 10) 
- 
208.5 
208.5 
- 
16.7 
16.7 
Other operating charges 
616.1 
2.8 
618.9 
588.1 
(0.4) 
587.7 
Net (profit)/loss on disposal (note 5) 
- 
(9.3) 
(9.3)
- 
4.2 
4.2 
2,252.5 
214.4 
2,466.9 
2,189.3 
18.9 
2,208.2
 
Fees earned by the auditor during the period consisted of: 
52 weeks  
29 December 
2024 
52 weeks  
31 December 
2023 
 
£m 
£m 
Audit of the consolidated financial statements 
0.3 
0.3 
Audit of subsidiaries 
1.0 
1.0 
Included in other operating charges 
1.3 
1.3 
 
The group’s auditors provided audit-related assurances services of £4k in the period (prior period: £4k).  
5 ADJUSTING ITEMS 
 
52 weeks  
29 December 
 2024 
52 weeks  
31 December 
2023 
 
£m 
£m 
Included in operating (loss)/profit 
 
 
Employee costs, restructuring charges, and other legal and professional fees 
(13.0) 
(1.8) 
Covid-related charges 
- 
(0.9) 
Net impairment charge of property, plant and equipment (note 11) and right-of-use assets (note 
20)  
(86.4) 
(16.7) 
Net impairment charge on goodwill (note 10) 
(122.1) 
- 
Income from Indirect Tax claims 
- 
1.2 
Net profit/(loss) on disposal of property, plant and equipment, investment property and leases  
9.3 
(4.2) 
Revaluation of investment property (note 12) 
0.3 
1.6 
Corporate transaction and project costs  
(1.8) 
(2.2) 
Insurance proceeds 
0.3 
4.1 
Brewery accelerated depreciation  
(1.0) 
- 
Total adjusting items included in operating (loss)/profit 
(214.4) 
(18.9) 
Included in financing costs 
 
 
Interest income on Indirect Tax claims 
- 
0.3 
Total adjusting financing costs 
- 
0.3 
Total adjusting items before tax 
(214.4) 
(18.6) 
Included in tax 
 
 
Tax effect of adjusting items 
21.5 
9.9 
Tax charge in respect of rate change 
- 
(0.3) 
Adjustment in respect of prior periods 
(9.1) 
1.1 
Total adjusting tax 
12.4 
10.7 
Total adjusting items after tax 
(202.0) 
(7.9) 
 

69 Strategic Report | Corporate Governance | Financial Statements 
 
Adjusting operating costs 
 
During the period, the group incurred £13.0m (prior period: £1.8m) of restructuring costs and other legal and professional fees. The 
group underwent a restructuring in Q4 2024, for further details see note 23.  
The impairment charge consists of a net impairment charge on properties (property, plant and equipment and right-of-use assets) of 
£86.4m and comprises a gross charge of £116.8m (prior period: £83.5m) offset by a reversal of previously recognised impairment losses 
of £30.4m (prior period: £66.8m).  
In the current year the group recognised goodwill impairment charges of £122.1m (prior period: nil) in respect of the cash generating 
units Destination Brands and Partnerships & Ventures, see note 10 for further details.  
The net profit on disposal of property, plant and equipment and leases of £9.3m (prior period loss: £4.2m) comprises a total profit on 
disposal of £15.2m (prior period: £2.5m) and a total loss on disposal of £5.9m (prior period: £6.7m). 
During the period the group recognised a gain of £0.3m (prior period: £4.1m) in respect of insurance compensation to meet the costs 
of restoring sites damaged by events such as fires and floods.  
During the period the group recognised a gain of £0.3m (prior period: £1.6m) in respect of the revaluation of investment property. 
The group incurred £1.8m (prior period: £2.2m) of professional fees on corporate transactions and projects.  
Following the group’s announcement in April 2024 of its plan to build a new modern brewery, a number of assets were identified that 
would become surplus to requirement following transition to the new brewery and therefore the depreciation has been accelerated 
resulting in an exceptional depreciation charge of £1.0m (prior period: £nil).    
Adjusting tax 
The adjusting tax credit of £12.4m (prior period: £10.7m) is made up of a credit of £21.5m on the above adjusting items offset by an 
adjusting tax charge of £9.1m which predominately represents the impact of final capital allowances claims and an adjustment for right-
of-use assets. The figure includes a current tax charge of £3.1m and a deferred tax adjustment charge in respect of right-of-use assets of 
£6.0m. 
There are no exceptional movements in the Group’s current and deferred tax on right-of-use assets (prior period: £0.5m charge), nor 
for rate change adjustments on deferred tax (prior period: £0.3m charge).  
 
6 EMPLOYMENT COSTS 
Employment costs (including directors) comprise: 
 
52 weeks  
29 December 2024 
 
Total 
 
52 weeks  
31 December 2023 
 
Total 
£m 
£m 
Wages and salaries  
728.4 
707.3 
Social security costs 
56.3 
52.7 
Pension costs (note 8) 
 
 
- Defined contribution 
16.4 
15.4 
Termination benefits 
11.7 
- 
812.8 
775.4 
Key management personnel 
Key management personnel are deemed to be those employees who are directors of Greene King Limited or its subsidiaries, and the 
senior leadership group. 
 
Remuneration of key management personnel 
52 weeks  
29 December 2024 
52 weeks  
31 December 2023 
 
£m 
£m 
Short term employment benefits and benefits under long-term incentive schemes 
9.5 
12.6 
Post-employment pension, medical and other benefits 
1.1 
0.8 
Termination benefits 
1.8 
- 
Included in other operating charges 
12.4 
13.4 
Included in the key management personnel table above are amounts receivable by directors of Greene King Limited, these amounts have 
been separately disclosed as directors’ remuneration in the table below. The post-employment pension contributions disclosed below 
relate to 2 directors (prior period: 2). 
 
Directors’ Remuneration 
 
52 weeks  
29 December 2024 
52 weeks  
31 December 2023 
 
£m 
£m 
Short term employment benefits and benefits under long-term incentive schemes 
2.1 
3.2 
Post-employment pension, medical and other benefits 
0.2 
0.2 
Included in other operating charges 
2.3 
3.4 

70 
 
Highest Paid Director 
 
52 weeks  
29 December 2024 
52 weeks  
31 December 2023 
 
£m 
£m 
Aggregate remuneration and benefits under long-term incentive schemes 
1.2 
2.0 
 
The monthly average number of team members during the period was as follows: 
 
52 weeks  
29 December 2024 
52 weeks  
31 December 2023 
Restated 
Greene King pubs 
16,705 
14,570 
Destination Brands  
16,578 
18,120 
Partnerships & Ventures 
5,407 
6,187 
Brewing & Brands 
837 
829 
Corporate 
1,061 
989 
 
40,588 
40,695 
 
The figures above include 31,015 (prior period restated: 30,556) part-time team members. 
The prior period comparatives have been restated as some employees had been incorrectly excluded from the disclosure. 
 
7 FINANCE (COSTS) / INCOME 
 
 
 
52 weeks  
29 December 2024 
 
52 weeks  
31 December 2023 
£m 
£m 
Bank loans and overdrafts 
(52.8) 
(41.8) 
Secured bonds and associated interest rate swaps, liquidity facilities and fees 
(53.4) 
(54.9) 
Loans from related parties 
(8.7) 
(8.4) 
Interest and finance costs on lease liabilities (note 20) 
(22.8) 
(21.6) 
Interest in respect of tax positions  
(0.3) 
- 
Total finance expense for financial liabilities not classified as at fair value through profit or loss 
(138.0) 
(126.7) 
 
 
 
Interest on indirect tax claims (note 5) 
- 
0.3 
 
 
 
Interest rate swaps and other derivatives movements  
 
 
Gain/(loss) on cash flow hedges reclassified from equity to profit or loss 
0.5 
(0.6) 
 
0.5 
(0.6) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Total finance costs 
(137.5) 
(127.0) 
 
 
 
Bank interest   
3.6 
2.4 
Total finance income for financial assets not classified as at fair value through profit or loss 
3.6 
2.4 
 
 
 
Net finance income from pensions (note 8) 
2.9 
2.6 
Interest in respect of tax positions and adjustments 
0.3 
- 
Total finance income 
6.8 
5.0 
Net finance costs 
(130.7) 
(122.0) 
 
8 PENSIONS 
Defined contribution pension schemes 
The group maintains three defined contribution schemes, which are open to all new team members. One defined contribution scheme 
closed to new contributions at the end of 2023. 
 
Member funds for the defined contribution schemes are held and administered by the Friends Life Group and Nest. The total cost 
recognised in operating profit for the period was £16.4m (prior period: £15.4m). 
Defined benefit pension schemes and post-employment benefits 
The group maintains two defined benefit schemes: the Greene King Pension Scheme and the Spirit (Legacy) Pension Scheme which are 
closed to new entrants and are closed to future accrual. Only administrative costs and deficit recovery contributions are incurred going 

71 Strategic Report | Corporate Governance | Financial Statements 
 
forward. Member funds for the defined benefit schemes are held in separate funds independently of the group’s finances and are 
administered by pension trustees. Pension benefits are related to members’ final salary at the earlier of retirement or closure to future 
accrual and their length of service. 
 
The group is aware of the 2023 High Court ruling relating to the validity of certain historical pension changes in the case of Virgin Media 
Limited, and the appeal to the Court of Appeal which was dismissed in 2024. The group, with assistance from an independent external 
advisor, has performed a review of readily available deeds executed during the period from 1997 to 2016 in respect of both its defined 
benefit pension schemes and has concluded that it is likely that an actuarial confirmation was obtained in each instance where one would 
have been required under Regulation 42 of the Occupational Pension Schemes (Contracting-out) Regulations 1996. While the group 
does not currently foresee any issues with its pension schemes, it is acknowledged that there remains some uncertainty regarding the 
potential need for a remeasurement of the defined benefit obligation, and possible financial impact of any consequential remeasurement, 
should it ever prove necessary. The group will continue to monitor developments related to this ruling. 
Greene King Pension Scheme 
The Trustees are required to carry out an actuarial valuation every three years. The result of this valuation determines the level of 
contributions payable by the group. The last triennial valuation of the Greene King Pension Scheme was performed by the Scheme 
actuary for the trustees as at 5 April 2021. The valuation as at 5 April 2021 revealed a funding shortfall of £13.3m. The recovery plan 
shows annual employer contributions of £3.5m per annum for a period of 3 years from 1 April 2021 to be paid into an escrow account 
due to the improvement in performance in the scheme from the previous valuation. The funds in the escrow account will not be treated 
as an asset of the scheme but will have access in specific circumstances. The next triennial actuarial valuation of the Greene King Pension 
Scheme will be as at 5 April 2024.  
The scheme was closed to future accruals on 30 September 2012. The group's contributions directly into the scheme during the period 
were £nil (prior period: £nil). The group’s contributions into escrow were £3.2m (prior period: £3.5m). 
An actuarial valuation was carried out for IAS 19 purposes as at 29 December 2024 by a qualified independent actuary. 
Spirit (Legacy) Pension Scheme 
The Trustees are required to carry out an actuarial valuation every three years. The result of this valuation determines the level of 
contributions payable by the group. The last triennial valuation of the Spirit (Legacy) Pension Scheme was performed by the Scheme 
actuary for the trustees as at 30 June 2021. The valuation as at 30 June 2021 revealed a funding surplus of £22.5m and that no recovery 
plan is required. The next triennial actuarial valuation of the Spirit (Legacy) Pension Scheme will be as at 30 June 2024.  
The scheme was closed to future accruals on 6 April 2005. The group's contributions during the period were £nil (prior period: £nil).  
The Spirit Pension scheme has done two buy-ins which provides insurance for a proportion of its members; the total insured value is 
c.£160m. An actuarial valuation was carried out for IAS 19 purposes as at 29 December 2024 by a qualified independent actuary. 
The pension schemes are exposed to inflation and interest rate risks, as well as changes in the life expectancy for pensioners. As the 
schemes' assets include investments in quoted equity shares, the group is also exposed to equity market risk. The majority of the bonds 
held by the schemes relate to UK government and corporate bonds in addition to liability driven investment (LDI) instruments and 
secured income funds.  
Income Statement 
Pension schemes 
29 December 2024 
31 December 2023 
Greene 
King 
Spirit 
Total 
Greene 
 King 
Spirit 
Total 
£m 
£m 
£m 
£m 
£m 
£m 
Interest on pension scheme assets 
12.8 
14.8 
27.6 
13.3 
16.2 
29.5
Interest on scheme liabilities 
(10.6) 
(14.1) 
(24.7) 
(11.6) 
(15.3) 
(26.9)
Net interest on net defined benefit asset 
2.2 
0.7 
2.9 
1.7 
0.9 
2.6
The values of the schemes’ liabilities have been determined by a qualified actuary based on the results of the last actuarial valuation, updated 
to 29 December 2024 using the following principal actuarial assumptions: 
 
29 December 2024 
 
31 December 2023 
 
Greene King 
Spirit 
Greene King 
Spirit 
Discount rate
 
 
5.5% 
5.5% 
4.5% 
4.5% 
Expected pension payment increases
 
 
3.0% 
3.0% 
3.0% 
3.0% 
Rate of inflation (RPI)
 
 
3.2% 
3.2% 
3.1% 
3.1% 
Rate of inflation (CPI)
 
 
2.7% 
2.7% 
2.5% 
2.5% 
The mortality assumptions imply the following expectations of 
years of life from age 65: 
 
 
 
 
Man currently aged 40 
 
22.3 
21.6 
22.3 
21.6 
Woman currently aged 40 
 
25.1 
24.1 
25.0 
24.0 
Man currently aged 65 
 
20.7 
19.3 
20.6 
19.3 
Woman currently aged 65 
 
23.3 
22.0 
23.2 
21.8 

72 
Mortality assumptions are based on standard tables adjusted for scheme experience and with an allowance for future improvement in life 
expectancy.  
The table below shows the investment allocation of pension assets against the related liabilities of the pension schemes: 
 
29 December 2024 
31 December 2023 
Greene King 
Spirit 
Total 
Greene King 
Spirit 
Total 
£m 
£m 
£m 
£m 
£m 
£m 
Investment quoted in active markets
Equities 
- 
36.6 
36.6 
- 
40.1 
40.1 
Bonds 
257.5 
174.4 
431.9 
281.8 
197.6 
479.4 
Unquoted investments 
 
 
 
 
 
Annuities insurance contracts 
2.3 
79.4 
81.7 
2.6 
93.0 
95.6 
Cash 
6.9 
4.1 
11.0 
6.8 
7.1 
13.9 
Total fair value of assets 
266.7 
294.5 
561.2 
291.2 
337.8 
629.0 
Present value of scheme liabilities: 
 
 
 
 
 
Funded plans 
(224.6) 
(288.2) 
(512.8)
(243.7) 
(320.8) 
(564.5) 
Non-current asset recognised 
42.1 
6.3 
48.4 
47.5 
17.0 
64.5 
£221.1m (prior period: £219.2m) of the bonds shown in the table above are liability-driven investments designed to broadly move in line 
with the changes in the value placed on the schemes’ liabilities. 
The movements in the pension schemes’ assets/(liabilities) during the period are as follows: 
 
Pension assets 
Pension liabilities 
Net Pension 
Greene 
King 
Spirit 
Greene 
King 
Spirit 
Asset 
£m 
£m 
£m 
£m 
£m 
Post-employment assets/(liabilities) at 1 January 2023 
287.8 
345.2 
(251.1) 
(326.7) 
55.2 
Pension interest income/(costs) recognised in the income statement 
13.3 
16.2 
(11.6) 
(15.3) 
2.6 
Benefits paid 
(16.0) 
(14.9) 
16.0 
14.9 
- 
Remeasurement gains/(losses) in other comprehensive income: 
 
 
 
 
 
Return on plan assets (excluding amounts included in net interest 
expenses) 
6.1 
(8.7) 
- 
- 
(2.6) 
  Actuarial changes arising from changes in demographic assumptions 
- 
- 
10.3 
16.2 
26.5 
  Actuarial changes arising from changes in financial assumptions 
- 
- 
(4.1) 
(5.5) 
(9.6) 
Experience adjustments  
- 
- 
(3.2) 
(4.4) 
(7.6) 
Post-employment assets/(liabilities) at 31 December 2023 
291.2 
337.8 
(243.7) 
(320.8) 
64.5 
Pension interest income/(costs) recognised in the income statement 
12.8 
14.8 
(10.6) 
(14.1) 
2.9 
Benefits paid 
(14.2) 
(15.6) 
14.2 
15.6 
- 
Remeasurement gains/(losses) in other comprehensive income: 
 
 
 
 
 
Return on plan assets (excluding amounts included in net interest 
expenses) 
(23.1) 
(42.5) 
- 
- 
(65.6) 
  Actuarial changes arising from changes in demographic assumptions 
- 
- 
(0.1) 
- 
(0.1) 
  Actuarial changes arising from changes in financial assumptions 
- 
- 
22.2 
30.8 
53.0 
Experience adjustments  
- 
- 
(6.6) 
0.3 
(6.3) 
Post-employment assets/(liabilities) at 29 December 2024 
266.7 
294.5 
(224.6) 
(288.2) 
48.4 
Presented in the balance sheet as follows: 
29 December 
2024 
£m 
31 December 
2023
£m
Post-employment assets 
48.4 
  64.5
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

73 Strategic Report | Corporate Governance | Financial Statements 
 
The sensitivities regarding the principal assumptions assessed in isolation that have been used to measure the scheme liabilities are set 
out below: 
 
 
Decrease/(increase) in liability 
 
29 December 
2024 
31 December 
2023 
 
£m 
£m 
0.5% points increase in discount rate  
25.2 
32.1 
0.5% points increase in inflation assumption  
(16.3) 
(21.8) 
Additional one-year increase to life expectancy 
(16.5) 
(21.2) 
There are no expected contributions to the defined benefit plan in future years and there are also no minimum funding requirements.  
The average duration of the defined benefit scheme’s obligations at the end of the period is 11 years (prior period: 13 years). 
9 TAXATION 
 
 
29 December 2024 
31 December 2023
         Total 
         Total
Consolidated income statement 
£m 
£m
Income tax 
  
  
Corporation tax  
2.8 
2.1
Current income tax 
2.8 
2.1
Adjustment in respect of prior periods 
3.1 
(3.6)
5.9 
(1.5)
Deferred tax 
Origination and reversal of temporary differences 
(2.7) 
4.0
Adjustment in respect of prior periods 
6.0 
2.4
Tax charge in respect of rate change 
- 
0.2
3.3 
6.6
Tax charge in the income statement 
 
5.1
9.2 
 
 
Group statement of comprehensive income 
29 December 2024 
£m 
31 December 2023
£m
Deferred tax 
Remeasurement gain/(loss) on defined benefit pension schemes 
(4.7) 
1.7
Net (loss)/gain on revaluation on cash flow hedges 
4.2 
 (1.6)
Total deferred tax charge  
(0.5) 
0.1
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

74 
Reconciliation of income tax charge for the period 
29 December 2024 
£m 
31 December 2023
£m
The effective rate of taxation is lower (prior period: lower) than the main rate of corporation tax. 
 
The differences are explained below: 
 
(Loss)/profit before tax 
(147.1) 
45.2 
(Loss)/profit before tax multiplied by the blended tax rate of 25% (prior period: 23.5%) 
(36.8) 
10.6
Adjusted for the effects of: 
 
 
Expenditure not allowable 
31.2 
1.7
Non-deductible interest 
- 
- 
Capital allowances super deduction 
- 
(0.5)
Deferred tax in respect of PP&E 
5.3 
(6.0)
Deferred tax movements on IFRS16 balances 
0.4 
0.3
Change in tax rate on deferred tax balances 
- 
0.2
Adjustment in respect of prior periods – current tax 
3.1 
(3.6)
Adjustment in respect of prior periods – deferred tax 
6.0 
2.4
Income tax charge reported in the income statement 
9.2 
5.1
Note 5 discusses the adjusting tax items. 
Income tax position 
The group's current tax receivable of £13.3m (prior period: £14.0m) reflects the amount of tax due from HMRC in respect of the current 
period. 
 
Deferred tax 
 
The deferred tax included in the group's balance sheet is as follows: 
 
Capital 
 losses 
 
Derivatives
 
Corporate 
interest 
restriction
Other 
temporary 
differences 
Trading 
 losses 
Total
Deferred tax assets 
£m 
£m 
£m
£m 
£m 
£m
At 1 January 2023 
38.9 
6.1
85.3
4.5
0.2
135.0
Credit to equity/comprehensive income 
- 
1.6
-
-
-
1.6
Credit/(charge) to the income statement 
4.1 
-
5.8 
(1.3)
14.2
22.8
At 31 December 2023 
43.0 
7.7
91.1
3.2
14.4
159.4
Reallocation 
- 
-
-
3.8
-
3.8
Charge to equity/comprehensive income 
- 
(4.2)
-
-
-
(4.2)
Credit/(charge) to the income statement 
(3.6) 
-
6.1
2.0
(3.9)
0.6
At 29 December 2024 
39.4 
3.5
97.2
9.0
10.5
159.6
 
 
 
Brand 
intangibles 
Post-
employment 
assets 
 
Accelerated 
capital 
allowances
Unrealised 
gains
 
IFRS 16 
 
 
 
 
Total
 
 
Deferred tax liabilities 
£m 
£m 
£m
£m
£m 
£m 
At 1 January 2023 
- 
(13.8)
(50.6)
(122.7)
(15.2)
(202.3)
Charge to equity/comprehensive income 
- 
(1.7)
-
-
-
(1.7)
(Charge)/credit to the income statement 
- 
(0.7) 
(33.4)
(1.7)
6.4
(29.4)
At 31 December 2023 
- 
(16.2)
(84.0)
(124.4)
(8.8)
(233.4)
Reallocation 
(3.8) 
- 
-
-
-
(3.8)
Charge to equity/comprehensive income 
- 
4.7 
-
-
-
4.7
(Charge)/credit to the income statement 
0.4 
(0.7) 
(5.1)
5.1
(3.6)
(3.9)
At 29 December 2024 
(3.4) 
(12.2) 
 (89.1)
(119.3)
(12.4)
(236.4)
 
Deferred tax assets and liabilities are offset when there is a legally enforceable right to offset income tax assets and income tax liabilities 
and when it is the intention to settle the balances on a net basis. Deferred tax assets and liabilities have therefore been offset and 
disclosed on the balance sheet as follows. 
 
 
 
29 December 2024 
£m 
31 December 2023
£m
Net deferred tax liability 
(76.7) 
(74.0) 

75 Strategic Report | Corporate Governance | Financial Statements 
 
At 29 December 2024, the group had unused trading losses of £42.0m (prior period: £59.3m) and unused capital losses of £779.5m 
(prior period: £781.0m). A deferred tax asset of £10.539.m (prior period: £14.4m) has been recognised in respect of trading losses. A 
deferred tax asset of £39.4m (prior period: £43.0m) has been recognised in respect of capital losses. Current legislation allows the 
group's tax losses to be carried forward indefinitely. 
 
Of the net deferred tax asset on corporate interest restriction, £41.9m (prior period: £37.2m) has been recognised against the future 
performance of the Group under IAS 12.29. Forecasts have been prepared showing that these tax losses are expected to be fully utilised 
in accordance with the corporate interest restriction rules within the forecast period. There is no expiry date on the corporate interest 
restrictions. 
 
Factors that may affect future tax charges 
The Group is subject to a rate of corporation tax of 25% for the period (prior period: 23.52%). The net deferred tax liability has been 
calculated using the rates at which each temporary difference is expected to reverse. 
 
Under Finance (No. 2) Act 2023 enacted 20 June 2023, a global minimum effective tax rate of 15% is introduced for periods of account 
beginning on or after 31 December 2023. Top-up taxes payable under this legislation are known as Pillar Two income taxes.  
 
The Group is part of the wider CK Asset Holdings Limited group, so will have to consider the Pillar Two implications from a groupwide 
perspective. As a number of jurisdictions are implementing Pillar Two legislation at different times, there is a degree of uncertainty as to 
the application of the rules to the Greene King group. Pillar Two legislation has been enacted in the UK, with effect from 1 January 2024, 
and as such, an assessment of the potential exposure to Pillar Two income taxes has been performed based on the Greene King group’s 
performance. Based on this assessment, the Group does not anticipate a significant top-up tax to arise for the Greene King group. The 
Group will continue to monitor this assessment as additional rules and guidance are issued. 
 
 
10 GOODWILL AND BRAND INTANGIBLES 
 
Brand 
 intangibles 
£m 
 Goodwill 
 
£m 
Cost 
At 1 January 2023 and 31 December 2023 
26.4 
1,119.0 
Additions 
- 
- 
At 29 December 2024 
26.4 
1,119.0 
Impairment and amortisation 
 
 
At 1 January 2023 
9.5 
194.3 
Amortisation 
1.6 
- 
At 31 December 2023 
11.1 
194.3 
Amortisation 
1.5 
- 
Impairment  
- 
122.1 
At 29 December 2024 
12.6 
316.4 
Net book value 
 
 
At 29 December 2024 
13.8 
802.6 
At 31 December 2023 
15.3 
924.7 
At 1 January 2023 
16.9 
924.7 
Brand intangibles were recognised as part of business combinations. Brand intangibles are amortised over the expected life of the asset 
and have an average remaining useful life of 9 years, and all relate to the Greene King pubs, Destination Brands and Partnerships & 
Ventures divisions.  
All goodwill was recognised as part of business combinations. Goodwill has been allocated to reporting segments, the lowest group of 
cash-generating units in the group at which goodwill is monitored internally, based on the extent that the benefits of acquisitions flow to 
that segment. 
During the period to 29 December 2024 the group has recognised an impairment charge of £122.1m (prior period: £nil) in the Destination 
Brands segment (£98.6m) and Partnerships & Ventures (£23.5m). The impairment of assets has been impacted by the uncertain outlook 
for the hospitality industry compounded by the government’s Autumn Budget along with a significant increase in gilt yields reflecting the 
inflationary pressures in the economy. This has driven the group’s discount rate from 8.6% to 9.1%.  
 
The carrying amount of goodwill is allocated as follows: 
29 December 2024 
£m 
31 December 2023 
£m 
 
Greene King pubs  
494.8 
494.8 
Destination Brands  
118.5 
217.1 
Partnerships & Ventures 
148.7 
172.2 
Brewing & Brands 
40.6 
40.6 
802.6 
924.7 
 
 
 

76 
Goodwill impairment testing 
The recoverable amount of each segment was determined on a value-in-use basis, using cash flow projections which are based on the 
latest strategic plan approved by the board, and in all cases exceeded the carrying amount.  
The key assumption used in the value-in-use calculations are forecasted cash flows which are based on the group's latest board approved 
five-year strategic plan. Other assumptions used in the value-in-use calculation include the pre-tax discount rate and a long-term growth 
rate used to extrapolate cash flows beyond the forecasted period: 
- 
The discount rate has been based on the group's WACC of 9.1% (prior period: 8.6%). As the risk factors are 
considered to be similar in each of the group's reporting segments the same discount rate is applied to all five 
divisions; and   
- 
A long-term growth rate of 2.0% (prior period: 2.0%) in Greene King pubs and Destination Brands, 2.0% (prior 
period: 1.9%) in Partnerships & Ventures, and -1.5% (prior period: -1.5%) in Brewing & Brands has been used. These 
rates are all below the long-term UK inflation and reflect the anticipated trends in future trading performance. 
Sensitivity to changes in assumptions 
The goodwill valuation is most sensitive to changes in the assumptions used for forecasted cash flows, pre-tax discount rate, and long-
term growth rate. Management considers that reasonably possible changes in assumptions would be an increase in pre-tax discount rate 
of 0.5%, a 10% reduction in the 5-year strategic plan net cash flows or a deterioration in the long-term growth rate by 25%.  
The 10% reduction in the 5-year strategic plan net cash flows, the deterioration in the long-term growth rate by 25% and 0.5% increase 
in discount rate would result in additional impairment of goodwill in the Destination Brands and Partnerships & Ventures divisions only, 
see below. The remaining sensitivities would not result in an impairment of goodwill. 
  
Destination 
Brands 
£m 
Partnerships & 
Ventures 
£m 
10% reduction in the 5-year strategic plan net cash flows 
217.1 
146.2 
25% reduction in long-term growth rate 
197.7 
102.9 
0.5% increase in discount rate 
190.5 
100.6 

77 Strategic Report | Corporate Governance | Financial Statements 
 
       11 PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT 
 
Licensed estate 
Other 
 
Land and 
buildings 
Plant and 
equipment 
Land and 
buildings 
Plant and 
equipment 
 
Total 
£m 
£m 
£m 
£m 
£m 
Cost 
 
At 1 January 2023 
3,588.0  
1,379.3  
82.7  
160.6  
5,210.6 
Additions (see below) 
56.1 
124.9  
0.9 
33.2  
215.1  
Transfer to property, plant and equipment held for 
sale 
(1.1) 
(0.1) 
- 
- 
(1.2) 
Transfer to Investment property 
(0.1) 
- 
 
- 
(0.1) 
Transfer to Licensed estate 
1.9 
- 
(1.9) 
- 
- 
Disposals 
(5.7) 
(14.3) 
(1.2) 
(1.6) 
(22.8) 
At 31 December 2023 
3,639.1 
1,489.8 
80.5  
192.2  
5,401.6 
Additions (see below) 
48.3 
113.2 
6.0 
25.3 
192.8 
Transfer to property, plant and equipment held for 
sale 
(2.3) 
(0.8) 
(2.4) 
(0.6) 
(6.1) 
Transfer from Licensed estate 
(18.6) 
(13.9) 
18.6 
13.9 
- 
Disposals 
(13.9) 
(17.0) 
(9.4) 
(8.2) 
(48.5) 
Reclassification (see below) 
- 
- 
5.2 
(5.2) 
- 
At 29 December 2024 
3,652.6 
1,571.3 
98.5 
217.4 
5,539.8 
Depreciation and impairment 
 
 
 
 
 
At 1 January 2023 
276.4  
910.6 
20.9 
114.3  
1,322.2  
Depreciation 
16.8 
77.5 
1.0 
8.7 
104.0 
Written back on disposals 
(5.2) 
(11.7) 
- 
(1.5) 
(18.4) 
Impairment (see below) 
61.5 
10.8 
1.2 
0.1 
73.6 
Impairment reversal (see below) 
(56.0) 
(6.8) 
(0.3) 
(0.1) 
(63.2) 
Transfer to property, plant and equipment held for 
sale 
- 
(0.1) 
- 
- 
(0.1) 
At 31 December 2023 
293.5 
980.3 
22.8 
121.5 
1,418.1 
Depreciation 
18.1 
83.0 
1.0 
13.5 
115.6 
Written back on disposals 
(4.2) 
(13.8) 
(5.3) 
(7.2) 
(30.5) 
Impairment (see below) 
97.6 
13.8 
1.5 
0.1 
113.0 
Impairment reversal (see below) 
(24.1) 
(2.8) 
(0.6) 
(0.4) 
(27.9) 
Transfer from Licensed estate 
(9.0) 
(11.4) 
9.0 
11.4 
- 
Transfer to property, plant and equipment held for 
sale 
(0.7) 
(0.6) 
(0.1) 
(0.5) 
(1.9) 
At 29 December 2024 
371.2 
1,048.5 
28.3 
138.4 
1,586.4 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Net book value 
 
 
 
 
 
At 29 December 2024 
3,281.4 
522.8 
70.2 
79.0 
3,953.4 
At 31 December 2023 
3,345.6  
509.5 
57.7 
70.7  
3,983.5 
At 1 January 2023 
3,311.6  
468.7  
61.8  
46.3  
3,888.4  
 
 
Additions in the period 
29 December 2024 
31 December 2023 
 
£m 
£m 
Consideration paid for Freehold reversion  
1.8 
   9.4 
Transfer of right-of-use assets (note 20) 
2.6 
8.9 
Transfer of lease liabilities (note 20) 
(1.1) 
(4.8) 
Total capitalised for freehold reversions 
3.3 
13.5 
Other property, plant and equipment additions 
189.5 
201.5 
Total additions 
192.8 
215.0 
The licensed estate relates to properties, and assets held within those properties which are licensed to sell alcohol (i.e. managed, tenanted, 
and leased houses). Other assets relate to property, plant and equipment associated with unlicensed properties (i.e. brewing, distribution, 
and central assets). 
 

78 
Reclassification 
Following a review, assets of £5.2m were reclassified to land and buildings from plant and equipment. 
 
The net book value of land and buildings comprises: 
29 December 2024 
£m 
31 December 2023
£m
Freehold properties 
3,202.5 
3,246.6 
Leasehold property improvements >50 years unexpired term 
92.8 
94.0 
Leasehold property improvements <50 years unexpired term 
56.3 
62.7 
3,351.6 
3,403.3 
The disaggregation of land and buildings into assets leased to tenants under operating leases and those held by the group is as follows: 
29 December 2024 
31 December 2023 
Licensed Estate 
Leased to 
tenants 
£m 
Used by the 
group 
£m 
Total 
 
£m 
 
Leased to 
tenants 
 
£m 
 
Used by the 
group 
 
£m 
 
Total 
 
 
£m 
Cost 
800.4 
2,852.2 
3,652.6 
806.4 
2,832.7 
3,639.1 
Depreciation and impairment 
(146.8) 
(224.4) 
(371.2)
(133.6) 
(159.9) 
(293.5) 
Net Book Value 
653.6 
2,627.8 
3,281.4 
672.8 
2,672.8 
3,345.6 
 
 
Charges over assets 
Included in property, plant and equipment are assets with a group net book value of £1,980.5m (prior period: £2,019.2m) over which 
there are first charges in favour of the securitised debt holders of the Greene King secured financing vehicle.  
Future capital expenditure 
 
29 December 2024 
£m 
31 December 2023
£m
Contracted for 
15.8  
14.6 
 
Impairment of property, plant and equipment 
During the period to 29 December 2024 the group has recognised a net impairment charge of £85.1m (prior period: £10.4m charge). 
This is comprised of an impairment charge of £113.0m (prior period: £73.6m) and reversal of previously recognised impairment losses 
of £27.9m (prior period: £63.2m). The recoverable amounts for assets impaired were based on the higher of value in use or fair value 
less cost of disposal. 
These are analysed between the group's principal reporting segments as shown below: 
 
29 December 2024 
31 December 2023 
 
Impairment 
Reversal of 
impairment 
Net 
impairment 
 
Impairment 
Reversal of 
impairment 
Net 
impairment 
£m 
£m 
£m 
£m 
 
£m 
 
£m 
 
Greene King pubs 
28.2
(10.2)
18.0 
19.6 
(33.7) 
(14.1) 
Destination Brands 
62.2
(8.0)
54.2 
20.3 
(23.8) 
(3.5) 
Partnerships & Ventures 
21.2
(8.9)
12.3 
32.5 
(5.3) 
27.2 
Brewing & Brands 
-
-
- 
- 
- 
- 
Corporate 
1.4
(0.8)
0.6 
1.2 
(0.4) 
0.8 
113.0
(27.9)
85.1 
73.6 
(63.2) 
10.4 
 
The group considers that each of its individual pubs is a cash-generating unit (CGU). Each CGU is reviewed annually for indicators of 
impairment or impairment reversal. When indicators of impairment or impairment reversal are identified the carrying value of the CGU 
is compared to its recoverable amount. The recoverable amount for assets impaired or with impairment reversal were based on the 
higher of value in use or fair value less cost of disposal. The impairment of assets has been impacted by the uncertain outlook for the 
hospitality industry compounded by the government’s Autumn Budget along with a significant increase in gilt yields reflecting the 
inflationary pressures in the economy. This has driven the group’s discount rate from 8.6% to 9.1%.  
 
The group estimates value in use using a discounted cash flow model. The key assumption used in the value-in-use calculations are 
forecasted cash flow projections which are based on the latest strategic plan approved by the board. Other assumptions used in the 
value-in-use calculations are the discount rate applied to those cash flows of 9.1% (prior period: 8.6%) and the long-term growth rate of 
2.0% (prior period: 2.0%) in Greene King pubs and Destination Brands and 2.0% (prior period: 1.8-2.0%) in Partnerships & Ventures 
which are in line with the long-term UK inflation rate and reflects anticipated trends in future trading performance. As risk factors are 
considered to be similar in each of the group's reporting segments the same level of discount rate is applied to all.  

79 Strategic Report | Corporate Governance | Financial Statements 
 
 
Estimates of fair value less costs of disposal are based on both internal and external valuations, with the latest external valuation being 
performed in December 2024. The valuation considers assumptions such as current and future projected income levels, which take 
account of the location and quality of the pub. In addition, recent market transactions in the sector and potential alternative use values 
have been considered. 
 
The valuation techniques applied are consistent with the principles in IFRS 13 Fair Value Measurement. As they use significant 
unobservable inputs, this is a recurring fair value measurement falling within Level 3 of the fair value hierarchy, which is further explained 
in note 22.  
 
Sensitivity to changes in assumptions 
The level of impairment is predominantly dependent upon judgments used in arriving at fair values, future growth rates and the discount 
rate applied to cash flow projections. The net impact on the impairment charge of applying different assumptions to fair values, the 
growth rates used to calculate cash flow projections and in the pre-tax discount rates used to estimate value in use would be as follows: 
 
 
 
 
 
Increased net  
impairment resulting 
from: 
A 10% reduction in fair 
value less cost of 
disposal 
A 10% reduction in the 
5-year strategic plan net 
cash flows  
A 0.5% pts increase in 
discount rate 
A 25% reduction in 
long-term growth rate 
29 December
2024
31 December
2023
29 December
2024
31 December 
2023 
29 December
2024
31 December
2023
29 December
2024
31 December
2023
£m
£m
£m
£m 
£m
£m
£m
£m
 
 
Greene King pubs 
3.8
2.8 
8.2 
4.2 
7.2 
4.8 
5.3 
3.9 
Destination Brands 
5.6
7.7 
18.5 
5.7 
13.2 
6.5 
10.5 
4.8 
Partnerships & Ventures 
8.9
3.3 
1.2 
7.8 
5.1 
5.6 
4.2 
4.4 
Corporate 
-
0.3 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
18.3
14.1 
27.9 
17.7 
25.5 
16.9 
20.0 
13.1 
  
12 INVESTMENT PROPERTIES 
Investment 
properties 
 
Total 
£m 
£m 
Fair Value 
 
At 1 January 2023 
 3.3 
3.3 
Additions 
1.0 
1.0 
Transferred from property, plant and equipment 
0.1 
0.1 
Increase in fair value 
1.6 
1.6 
At 31 December 2023 
                    6.0 
                        6.0 
Additions 
5.6 
5.6 
Transferred from property, plant and equipment 
- 
- 
Disposals 
(0.4) 
(0.4) 
Increase in fair value 
0.3 
0.3 
At 29 December 2024 
11.5 
11.5 
 
 
 
Amounts recognised in profit and loss for investment properties: 
 
29 December 2024 
31 December 2023 
 
£m 
£m 
Rental income  
8.9 
- 
Direct operating expenses from property that did not generate rental income 
0.1 
0.2 
Direct operating expenses from property that did generate rental income 
- 
- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

80 
Investment properties are properties held for returns on sales or rental and are not occupied by the group. They are carried at fair value 
and any changes in fair values are presented in the profit or loss as part of other operating expenses, see note 4. The current period 
valuations were performed in December 2024 by Colliers International, independent chartered surveyors, acting as external valuers, on 
an open market value. The valuation considers assumptions such as the location and quality of the asset and expected income yield. In 
addition, recent market transactions in the sector and potential alternative use values have been considered. The valuation techniques 
applied are consistent with the principles in IFRS 13 Fair Value Measurement. As they use significant unobservable inputs, this is a recurring 
fair value measurement falling within Level 3 of the fair value hierarchy, which is further explained in note 22. 
 
Future capital expenditure 
29 December 2024 
31 December 2023 
 
£m 
£m 
Contracted for 
1.6 
1.1 
 
13 OTHER FINANCIAL ASSETS 
29 December 2024
£m
31 December 2023
£m
Trade loans (net of provision) 
4.9 
5.0
Total current 
4.9 
5.0
 
 
Trade loans (net of provision) 
9.4 
8.9
Total non-current 
9.4 
8.9
Trade loans are net of provisions of £3.5m (prior period: £3.2m). During the period £nil (prior period: £nil) of the provision was utilised, 
£nil (prior period: £0.4m) of the provision was reversed and new provisions of £0.3m were made (prior period: £nil).  
Information about the group's exposure to credit and market risks, and impairment losses for Trade Loans is included in note 22. 
Trade loans are advanced to customers on terms linked to supply terms such that returns are greater than interest income. The gross 
fixed rate trade loans amounted to £11.3m (prior period: £10.1m) and gross variable rate trade loans amounted to £6.5m (prior period: 
£7.8m). Included in fixed rate loans are £10.5m of loans with settlement related to purchase levels (prior period: £8.1m). The write-
down of these loans has been taken on a straight-line basis over the remaining term of the loan as an approximation of the settlement 
within revenue. 
The fixed rate trade loans had a weighted average interest rate of 0.04% (prior period: 0.05%) and a weighted average period of 4.13 
years (prior period: 4.06 years). Interest rates on variable rate trade loans are linked to base rates.  
 
29 December 2024 
£m 
31 December 2023
£m
Trade loans (net of provision) 
Balance at beginning of period 
13.9 
13.5
Advances 
6.9 
5.2
Repayments 
(6.2) 
(5.2)
Provisions (made)/reversed 
(0.3) 
0.4
Balance at end of period 
14.3 
13.9
 
 

81 Strategic Report | Corporate Governance | Financial Statements 
14 SUBSIDIARY UNDERTAKINGS
Greene King Limited is the beneficial owner of all of the equity share capital, either itself or through subsidiary undertakings, of the following companies. 
Subsidiary undertakings 
Principal activity 
Country of 
incorporation 
Registration 
Number 
Holding 
Proportion of 
voting rights 
and ownership 
Directly held by Greene King Limited 
Gie us Peece Limited3 
In MVL 
Scotland 
SC472578 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Greene King CH Investments Limited1,7 
Property 
England & Wales 
13598718 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Greene King Commercial Investments Limited1 Property 
England & Wales 
13598563 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Greene King Developments Limited1 
Dormant 
England & Wales 
07425525 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Greene King GP Limited5 
In MVL 
England & Wales 
01158678 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Greene King Investments Limited1,7 
Holding company 
England & Wales 
07426985 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Greene King Pension Scheme Limited1,8 
Pension trustee 
England & Wales 
00916075 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Greene King Properties Limited1 
Property 
England & Wales 
07543698 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Greene King Property Development Limited1,7 Property 
England & Wales 
13598526 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Greene King Pubs Limited1,7 
Holding company 
England & Wales 
07427021 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Greene King Residential Investments Limited1,7 Property 
England & Wales 
13588101 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Holding company 
England & Wales 
05265454 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Holding company 
England & Wales 
09211866 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
In MVL 
Guernsey 
48085 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Holding company 
England & Wales 
07662835 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
In MVL 
England & Wales 
04119367 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
In MVL 
England & Wales 
02911600 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Retailing 
England & Wales 
04755626 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Non-trading 
Scotland 
SC022860 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
In MVL 
Scotland 
SC146920 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
In MVL 
England & Wales 
00057987 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
In MVL 
England & Wales 
04661726 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
In MVL 
England & Wales 
04661724 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
In MVL 
England & Wales 
04555609 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Holding company 
England & Wales 
06996820 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
In MVL 
England & Wales 
05462825 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Brewing and retailing 
England & Wales 
03298903 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
In MVL 
England & Wales 
00025090 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
In MVL 
England & Wales 
02191112 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Non-trading 
England & Wales 
05073303 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Employment 
England & Wales 
03324496 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Pub retailing 
England & Wales 
05265451 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Non-trading 
England & Wales 
03324493 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
In MVL 
England & Wales 
00052412 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Retailing 
England & Wales 
08119161 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Dormant 
England & Wales 
07122366 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Dormant 
England & Wales 
08118716 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Non-trading 
England & Wales 
00056674 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
In MVL 
Scotland 
SC112027 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Dormant 
Scotland 
SC202775 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
In MVL 
England & Wales 
04555610 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
In MVL 
England & Wales 
04700766 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Greene King Retailing Parent Limited1 
Johoco 2029 Limited6 
Norman Limited2 
Spirit Pub Company Limited1,7 
The Capital Pub Company Limited5,7 
Indirectly held by Greene King Limited 
Allied Kunick Entertainments Limited5 
Bar Lounge Limited6 
Belhaven Brewery Company Limited3 
Belhaven Pubs Limited3 
Cleveland Place Holdings Limited5,7 
CPH Palladium Limited5 
Dearg Limited5 
Freshwild Limited5 
G.K. Holdings  No.1 Limited1,7 
Greene King Acquisitions No.2 Limited5 
Greene King Brewing and Retailing Limited1 
Greene King Leasing No.1 Limited5 
Greene King Leasing No.2 Limited5 
Greene King Neighbourhood Estate Pubs 
Limited1 
Greene King Retail Services Limited 
Greene King Retailing Limited1 
Greene King Services Limited1 
Hardys & Hansons Limited5 
Hickory's (ROS) Ltd6 
Hickory's Smokehouse Limited6 
Hickory's (West Kirby) Limited6 
Huggins and Company Limited1 
Jeely Peece Limited3 
LFR Group Limited3 
Mountloop Limited3 
Narnain5 
Old English Inns Limited5 
In MVL 
England & Wales 
03864820 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Premium Dining Restaurants and Pubs Limited3 Non-trading 
Scotland 
SC181811 
Ordinary shares 
100% 

82 
 
Subsidiary undertakings 
Principal activity 
Country of 
incorporation 
Registration 
Number 
Holding 
Proportion of 
voting rights 
and ownership 
Indirectly held by Greene King Limited 
continued 
R.V. Goodhew Limited5 
In MVL 
England & Wales 
00941642 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Realpubs Developments Limited5 
In MVL 
England & Wales 
06435334 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Realpubs II Limited5 
In MVL 
England & Wales 
06435335 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Sapphire Food South West No.2 Limited5 
In MVL 
England & Wales 
04524261 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Serkin Limited3 
In MVL 
Scotland 
SC064952 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Spirit (AKE Holdings) Limited5 
In MVL 
England & Wales 
03982423 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Spirit (Faith) Limited5 
In MVL 
England & Wales 
03724077 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Spirit (Legacy) Pension Trustee Limited1,8 
Pension trustee 
England & Wales 
07729971 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Spirit (SGL) Limited5 
In MVL 
England & Wales 
03982443 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Spirit Financial Holdings Limited1,7 
Holding company 
England & Wales 
04320672 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Spirit Finco Limited4 
In MVL 
Cayman Islands 
114500 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Spirit Funding Limited4 
In MVL 
Cayman Islands 
114506 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Spirit Group Equity Limited1,8 
Holding company 
England & Wales 
04271971 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Spirit Group Holdings Limited1,8 
Holding company 
England & Wales 
04872028 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Spirit Group Parent Limited1,8 
Holding company 
England & Wales 
04872039 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Spirit Group Retail (Northampton) Limited5 
In MVL 
England & Wales 
04090163 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Spirit Group Retail Limited1 
Holding company 
England & Wales 
03794854 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Spirit Intermediate Holdings Limited1,8 
Holding company 
England & Wales 
04914762 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Spirit Managed Funding Limited5 
In MVL 
England & Wales 
05266806 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Spirit Managed Holdings Limited1,8 
Holding company 
England & Wales 
04271973 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Spirit Managed Inns Limited1 
Non-trading 
England & Wales 
05266815 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Spirit Parent Limited1,8 
Holding company 
England & Wales 
04271748 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Spirit Pub Company (Derwent) Limited5 
In MVL 
England & Wales 
08822132 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Spirit Pub Company (Holdco) Limited1,8 
Holding company 
England & Wales 
07662211 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Spirit Pub Company (Investments) Limited5 
In MVL 
England & Wales 
07020781 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Spirit Pub Company (Leased) Limited1 
Leasing of public houses 
England & Wales 
05699544 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Spirit Pub Company (Managed) Limited1 
Pub retailing 
England & Wales 
05269240 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Spirit Pub Company (Services) Limited1,7 
Non-trading 
England & Wales 
05266811 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Spirit Pub Company (SGE) Limited1,7 
Holding company 
England & Wales 
07662502 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Spirit Pub Company (Supply) Limited5 
In MVL 
England & Wales 
04341771 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Spirit Pub Company (Trent) Limited1 
Pub retailing 
England & Wales 
05746068 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Spirit Pubs Debenture Holdings Limited1,8 
Holding company 
England & Wales 
05266779 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Spirit Pubs Parent Limited1,7 
Holding company 
England & Wales 
05267589 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Spirit Retail Bidco Limited5 
In MVL 
England & Wales 
04872046 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
The Chef & Brewer Group Limited1 
Holding company 
England & Wales 
00455013 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Tom Cobleigh Limited5 
In MVL 
England & Wales 
02673413 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Ubiquitous Chip Ltd3 
In MVL 
Scotland 
SC111803 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
Upstairs at the Grill Limited6 
Dormant 
England & Wales 
04750556 
Ordinary shares 
100% 
 
1. Registered office: Westgate Brewery, Bury St. Edmunds, Suffolk, IP33 1QT. 
2. Registered office: c/o Kroll Guernsey Limited, 10 Lefebvre Street, St Peter Port, Guernsey, GY1 2PE. 
3. Registered office: Belhaven Brewery, Brewery Lane, Dunbar, East Lothian, EH42 1PE. 
4. Registered office: c/o Kroll (Cayman) Ltd., 3rd Floor, 90 North Church Street, George Town, Grand Cayman, Cayman Islands. 
5. Registered office: c/o Kroll Advisory Ltd, The Shard 32 London Bridge Street, London, SE1 9SG 
6. Registered office: Suites G & H Ground Floor Steam Mill, Steam Mill Street, Chester, Cheshire, CH3 5AN. Since the balance sheet date the registered office has changed 
to Lea Hall Farm, Lea Lane, Aldford, Cheshire, United Kingdom, CH3 6JQ. 
7. These companies are exempt from the requirement to prepare individual audited financial statements in respect of the 52-week period ended 29 December 2024 by virtue 
of sections 479A and 479C of the Companies Act 2006. 
8. These companies are exempt from the requirement to prepare and file individual dormant financial statements in respect of the 52-week period ended 29 December 2024 
by virtue of sections 394A-C and 448A-C of the Companies Act 2006. 
Member’s voluntary liquidation “MVL” 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

83 Strategic Report | Corporate Governance | Financial Statements 
 
15 INVENTORIES 
29 December 2024 
£m 
31 December 2023
£m
Raw materials and work in progress 
2.9 
3.5
Finished goods and goods for resale 
50.1 
54.6
Consumable stores 
3.2 
3.0
56.2 
61.1
 
Inventory provisions decreased by £0.4m (prior period: £1.2m) in the period. 
 
16 TRADE AND OTHER RECEIVABLES 
 
 
29 December 2024 
£m 
31 December 2023
£m
Trade receivables 
63.9 
60.9
Other receivables 
26.6 
33.9
Amounts owed from related parties (note 29) 
- 
22.0
Total current 
90.5 
116.8
 
 
 
Pension escrow account 
8.6 
5.0
Amounts owed from related parties (note 29) 
22.0 
- 
Total non-current 
30.6 
5.0
 
Trade and other receivables are non-interest bearing. Other receivables, recognised at fair value, primarily relate to amounts due 
from suppliers in respect of rebates and accrued income.  
Trade receivables are shown net of a loss allowance of £6.1m (prior period: £7.2m). Information about the group’s exposure to credit 
and market risks, and impairment losses for trade receivables is included in note 22. 
In the current year amounts owed from related parties of £22.0m were reclassified from current to non-current as whilst it’s an 
undocumented loan which bears no interest and is repayable on demand, there is no intention to call repayment of the balance for a 
period of 12 months from the balance sheet date.   
 
17 CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS 
29 December 2024 
£m 
31 December 2023 
£m 
Cash at bank and in hand 
104.5
120.1 
Cash and cash equivalents for cash flow 
104.5 
120.1 
Included in cash at bank and in hand and short-term deposits is £112.6m (prior period: £83.9m) held within securitised bank accounts 
which are only available for use by the Greene King secured financing vehicle.  
The Greene King secured financing vehicle comprises Greene King Retailing Parent Limited and one of its subsidiaries. 
The group operates two notional pools, between which the group’s account bank has no right of offset. The group’s accounting policy 
is to derecognise trade payables and cash on the date it initiates an electronic payment. On 27 December 2024 the group initiated a 
batch of supplier payments and accordingly the corresponding trade payable and cash balances were derecognised on this date. The 
payments settled on 31 December 2024. As a result of this accounting treatment, the carrying value of cash for one of the notional 
pools was negative as at the balance sheet date. As neither notional pool was overdrawn on a cash basis on the balance sheet date 
or the settlement date of the payments in question, this negative balance of £26.6m has been presented within cash at bank and in 
hand. 
Interest receivable on cash and short-term deposits is linked to prevailing interest rates and is received either monthly or quarterly. 
18 PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT HELD FOR SALE 
 
 
29 December 2024 
£m 
31 December 2023 
£m 
Property, plant and equipment held for sale 
4.2 
1.1 
 
At the year end, property, plant and equipment held for sale of £4.2m (prior period: £1.1m) represents pubs that are being actively 
marketed for sale with expected completion dates within one year. The value of property, plant and equipment held for sale represents 
the expected net disposal proceeds; further details on the valuation of the property, plant and equipment less costs of disposal are 
held in note 11. The impairment charge on assets held for sale was £0.7m (prior period: £nil). 

84 
 
19 TRADE AND OTHER PAYABLES 
29 December 2024 
£m 
31 December 2023 
£m 
Trade payables 
114.8 
121.2 
Other payables 
 
 
– Other taxation and social security costs 
89.7 
67.1 
– Accruals and deferred income 
240.8 
265.7 
– Interest payable 
4.8 
5.6 
Total current 
450.1 
459.6 
Trade payables and other payables are non-interest bearing. Interest payable is mainly settled monthly, quarterly, or semi-annually 
throughout the period, in accordance with the terms of the related financial instrument.  
20 LEASES 
Group as a lessee 
The group has lease contracts for property and various items of plant, machinery, vehicles and other equipment used in its operations. 
Rental contracts are on average for a lease term of 30 years. The group's obligations under its leases are secured by the lessor's title to 
the leased assets. Generally, the group is restricted from assigning and subleasing the leased assets and some contracts require the group 
maintain certain financial ratios. There are several lease contracts that include extension and termination options and variable lease 
payments, which are further discussed below. 
The group also has certain leases of machinery with lease terms of 12 months or less and leases of office equipment with low value. The 
group applies the 'short-term lease' and 'lease of low-value assets' recognition exemptions for these leases. 
Information about leases for which the group is a lessee is presented below: 
Right-of-use assets 
 
Plant and 
 
Property 
Equipment 
Total 
£m 
£m 
£m 
Cost 
At 1 January 2023 
605.6 
47.0 
652.6 
Additions  
13.7 
10.2 
23.9 
Disposals  
(10.3) 
(5.1) 
(15.4) 
Transfer to property, plant and equipment (note 11) 
(10.4) 
- 
(10.4) 
Remeasurement 
10.2 
0.3 
10.5 
At 31 December 2023 
608.8 
52.4 
661.2 
Additions  
21.5 
13.6 
35.1 
Disposals  
(13.6) 
(5.5) 
(19.1) 
Transfer to property, plant and equipment (note 11) 
(2.9) 
- 
(2.9) 
Remeasurement 
(63.2) 
0.1 
(63.1) 
At 29 December 2024 
550.6 
60.6 
611.2 
Depreciation and impairment 
 
 
 
At 1 January 2023 
109.8 
15.9 
125.7 
Depreciation 
29.0 
8.5 
37.5 
Written back on disposals 
(5.4) 
(4.4) 
(9.8) 
Transfer to property, plant and equipment (note 11) 
(1.5) 
- 
(1.5) 
Impairment 
6.3 
- 
6.3 
At 31 December 2023 
138.2 
20.0 
158.2 
Depreciation 
29.1 
9.8 
38.9 
Written back on disposals 
(9.7) 
(5.8) 
(15.5) 
Transfer to property, plant and equipment (note 11) 
(0.3) 
- 
(0.3) 
Impairment 
1.3 
- 
1.3 
At 29 December 2024 
158.6 
24.0 
182.6 
Net book value 
 
 
 
At 29 December 2024 
392.0 
36.6 
428.6 
At 31 December 2023 
470.6 
32.4 
503.0 
At 1 January 2023 
495.8 
31.1 
526.9 

85 Strategic Report | Corporate Governance | Financial Statements 
 
Impairment of Right-of-use assets 
During the period to 29 December 2024 the group has recognised a net impairment of £1.3m (prior period: £6.3m). This is comprised 
of an impairment charge of £3.8m (prior period: £9.9m) and reversal of previously recognised impairment losses of £2.5m (prior period: 
£3.6m). The recoverable amounts for assets impaired were based on a combination of value in use or fair value less cost of disposal.  
These are analysed between the group's principal reporting segments as shown below: 
 
 
29 December 2024 
31 December 2023 
 
Impairment 
Reversal of 
impairment 
Net 
impairment 
Impairment 
Reversal of 
impairment 
Net 
Impairment 
 
£m 
£m 
£m 
£m 
£m 
£m 
Partnerships & Ventures 
0.4 
(0.4) 
- 
4.1 
- 
4.1 
Greene King pubs 
1.3 
(1.9) 
(0.6) 
3.5 
(0.8) 
2.7 
Destination Brands 
2.1 
- 
2.1 
1.4 
(2.8) 
(1.4) 
Corporate 
- 
(0.2) 
(0.2) 
0.9 
- 
0.9 
 
3.8 
(2.5) 
1.3 
9.9 
(3.6) 
6.3 
The group considers that each of its individual pubs is a cash-generating unit (CGU), ROUA has been considered within the wider 
impairment process of property, plant and equipment. For details on the impairment process see note 11.  
Sensitivity to changes in assumptions 
The level of impairment is predominantly dependent upon judgments used in arriving at fair values, future growth rates and the discount 
rate applied to cash flow projections. The net impact on the impairment charge of applying different assumptions to fair values, the growth 
rates used to calculate cash flow projections and in the pre-tax discount rates used to estimate value in use would be as follows: 
 
 
Increased net  
impairment resulting 
from: 
A 10% reduction in 
fair value less cost of 
disposal 
A 10% reduction in 
the 5-year strategic 
plan net cash flows 
A 0.5% pts  
increase in 
discount rate 
A 25% reduction 
in long-term  
growth rate 
29 December
2024
31 December 
2023
29 December 
2024
31 December 
2023
29 December 
2024
31 December 
2023
29 December 
2024 
31 December 
2023
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m 
£m
 
Greene King pubs 
-
0.1
0.5 
0.1
0.3 
- 
0.1 
- 
Destination Brands 
0.1
0.3
0.1 
0.1
- 
- 
- 
- 
Partnerships & 
Ventures 
0.2
-
- 
0.3
- 
0.1 
- 
0.1 
Corporate 
-
0.1
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
0.3
0.5
0.6 
0.5
0.3 
0.1 
   0.1 
0.1 
Lease liabilities 
 
Lease liabilities included in the statement of financial position  
£m 
As at 1 January 2023 
564.3 
Additions 
23.1 
Interest expense relating to lease liabilities 
21.6 
Disposals 
(5.8) 
Transfer to property, plant and equipment (note 11) 
(4.8) 
Remeasurements 
10.5 
Repayment of lease liabilities (including interest) 
(51.5) 
Rent concessions 
0.4 
As at 31 December 2023 
557.8 
Additions 
35.1 
Interest expense relating to lease liabilities 
22.8 
Disposals 
(7.1) 
Transfer to property, plant and equipment (note 11) 
(1.1) 
Remeasurements 
(63.1) 
Repayment of lease liabilities (including interest) 
(53.7) 
As at 29 December 2024 
490.7 
 
 
 

86 
Maturity of lease liability 
29 December 2024 
£m 
31 December 2023 
£m 
Current 
25.1 
26.8 
Non-current 
465.6 
531.0 
 
 
 
Maturity analysis – contractual undiscounted cashflows: 
 
 
Less than one year 
51.2 
48.9 
One to five years 
185.7 
174.3 
More than five years 
540.4 
714.0 
Total undiscounted lease liabilities 
777.3 
937.2 
 
Amounts recognised in the statement of profit and loss 
29 December 2024 
£m 
31 December 2023 
£m 
Depreciation on right-of-use assets 
 
 
Property 
29.1 
29.0 
Plant and equipment 
9.8 
8.5 
Other lease expense and sublease income 
2.4 
0.9 
Impairment of right-of-use assets  
1.3 
6.3 
Charged to Operating Profit 
42.6 
44.7 
Interest expense related to lease liabilities 
22.8 
21.6 
Charge to Profit before Taxation for leases 
65.4 
66.3 
The total cash outflow for leases was £53.7m (prior period: £51.5m). 
Extension and termination options 
Some property and machinery contain extension or termination options exercisable by group before the end of the non-cancellable 
period. Where practicable, the group seeks to include these options in new leases to provide operational flexibility. These extension and 
termination options held are exercisable only by the group and not by the lessors. The group assesses at lease commencement whether 
it is reasonably certain to exercise the extension or termination options. The group reassesses whether it is reasonably certain to exercise 
the options if there is a significant event or significant change in circumstances within its control. During the period extension options of 
£79.5m were reversed following a reassessment of the likelihood of exercising these options.  
The group has estimated that the potential future lease payments, should it exercise the extension options, would result in an increase 
in future cash outflows of £255.4m (prior period: £83.9m) and should it exercise the termination options, would result in a decrease in 
cash outflows of £2.3m (prior period: £9.7m). 
 

87 Strategic Report | Corporate Governance | Financial Statements 
 
21 BORROWINGS 
 
 
 
29 December 2024 
31 December 2023 
Current Non-current 
Total 
Current Non-current 
Total 
Repayment date 
£m 
£m
£m 
£m 
£m 
£m 
Bank overdrafts 
On demand 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
Bank Loans: 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
– Revolving loans 
2025-2026 
494.7 
79.8 
574.5 
199.8
619.0
818.8
– Term Loans 
2025-2029 
80.0 
298.9 
378.9 
-
79.9
79.9
Other Loans: 
 
 
 
 
– Revolving loans from related 
parties 
2028 
- 
- 
- 
311.0
-
311.0
– Loan advance 
On demand 
311.0 
- 
311.0 
-
-
-
Secured debt: 
 
 
 
 
– Issued by Greene King Finance plc 
2031 to 2036 
68.2 
889.6 
957.8 
61.6
957.9
1,019.5
953.9 
1,268.3 
2,222.2 
572.4
1,656.8
2,229.2
Bank overdrafts 
Overdrafts are utilised for the day-to-day management of cash. The group has facilities of £10.0m (prior period: £10.0m) available with 
interest linked to base rate. 
Bank loans – unsecured 
The group has available unsecured loan facilities totalling £1,100.0m, comprising £720.0m revolving loan facilities and £380.0m term 
loan facilities. This includes two new £100.0m and £200.0m term loan facilities which were executed in 2024. The loans are guaranteed 
by CK Asset Holdings Limited, the group's ultimate parent. The facilities are available to be used for general corporate purposes.  
Of the £720.0m (prior period: £920.0m) available under the revolving loan facilities, £575.0m (prior period: £740.0m) was drawn 
down at the period end with a carrying value of £574.5m (prior period: £818.8m) which included £0.5m (prior period: £1.2m) of fees. 
Of the £380.0m term loan facilities, £380.0m was fully drawn with a carrying value of £378.9m (prior period: £79.9m) which included 
£1.1m (prior period: £0.1m) of fees. 
Under the revolving loan facilities, any amounts drawn down bear interest at a margin and (where applicable) credit adjustment spread 
above SONIA and commitment interest is charged on the undrawn portions. Interest is payable upon repayment of each drawdown, 
which vary in length. Although any individual drawdowns are repayable within 12 months of the balance sheet date, the group expects 
to renew this funding and immediate renewal is available until the maturity of the facilities which fall between February 2025 and 
December 2026. Under each facility, final repayment of the total drawn-down balance is due as one payment on the maturity date. 
Under the term loan facilities, the drawn amount bears interest at a margin and (where applicable) credit adjustment spread above 
SONIA and interest is payable at the end of each interest period, which may vary in length. The drawn amount is repayable on 
maturity of the facilities which fall between February 2025 and December 2029. 
 
Other loans - unsecured 
The group has available an unsecured revolving loan facility with CKA Holdings UK Limited, an intermediate parent. The facility is available 
to be used for general corporate purposes.  
Of the £1,500.0m (prior period: £1,500.0m) available under the facility, £nil (prior period: £311.0m) was drawn down at the year end 
with a carrying value of £nil (prior period: £311.0m). 
Any amounts drawn down bear interest at a fixed rate of 7.0%. Interest is payable following the end of each interest period which are 
typically 3 months in length. Drawn amounts are repayable on maturity of the facility in November 2028. 
The group has further received a loan advance of £311.0m (prior period: £nil) from CKA Holdings UK Limited. This is repayable on 
demand and bears a 0% interest rate. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

88 
 
Greene King secured financing vehicle 
The group has issued various tranches of bonds in connection with the securitisation of pubs operated by Greene King Retailing Limited. 
The bonds are secured over the properties and their future income streams and were issued by Greene King Finance plc. 
The group’s securitised debt issued by Greene King Finance plc consists of the following tranches: 
 
Carrying value (£m)1 
 
 
Tranche 
Nominal value 
(£m) 
29 December 
2024 
31 December 
2023 
Interest 
Interest 
 rate (%)2 
Last 
repayment 
period 
    Weighted 
average life3 
A2 
155.3 
154.2 
168.8
Fixed 
5.32 
2031 
3.8 years 
A4 
204.4 
203.6 
220.7
Fixed 
5.11 
2034 
5.0 years 
A6 
180.9 
179.0 
193.6
Fixed 
4.06 
2035 
5.8 years 
A7 
203.3 
201.0 
216.6
Fixed 
3.59 
2035 
5.2 years 
B1 
120.9 
120.5 
120.3
Floating 
6.96 
2034 
8.4 years 
B2 
99.9 
99.5 
99.5
Floating 
6.92 
2036 
10.5 years 
964.7 
957.8 
1,019.5
1. Carrying value is net of related deferred finance fees. 
2. Includes the effect of interest rate swap rates on the floating rate notes; the group’s interest rate swap arrangements are discussed in note 22. 
3. Assumes notes are held until final maturity. 
The interest payable on each of the floating rate tranches is as follows: 
Tranche 
Interest rate 
payable1 
Interest rate 
swap 
Total interest 
rate 
B1 
S+1.80% 
5.16%-S 
6.96% 
B2 
S+2.08% 
4.84%-S 
6.92% 
1. For the floating rate bonds the interest rate payable is the compounded SONIA plus 0.1193% (this sum being denoted by “S” above) plus the margin as shown. 
Repayment of the principal is made by quarterly instalments, in accordance with the repayment schedule, over the period shown above. 
Payment of interest is made on quarterly dates for all classes of bond. All of the floating rate bonds are fully hedged using interest rate 
swaps. 
The Class A2, A4, A6 and A7 bonds rank pari passu in point of security and as to payment of interest and principal and have preferential 
interest payment and repayment rights over the Class B bonds. The Class B1 and B2 bonds rank pari passu in point of security, principal 
repayment and interest payment. 
The securitisation is governed by various covenants, warranties and events of default, many of which apply to Greene King Retailing Limited, 
a group company. These include covenants regarding the maintenance and disposal of securitised properties and restrictions on its ability to 
move cash to other group companies.  The group has complied with these covenants in 2024 and 2023. 
The group has available liquidity facilities totalling £224.0m (prior period: £224.0m) which can only be used for the purpose of meeting the 
securitisation’s debt service obligations should there ever be insufficient funds available from operations to meet such payments. There were 
no drawdowns under these facilities during the period and the drawn down amount at the year end was £nil (prior period: £nil). 
 
 

89 Strategic Report | Corporate Governance | Financial Statements 
 
22 FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS 
 
The group holds the following financial instruments: 
29 December 2024 
31 December 2023 
Current 
Non-
current 
Total 
Current Non-current 
Total 
Note 
£m 
£m 
£m 
£m 
£m 
£m 
Financial assets 
Financial assets at amortised cost 
 
 
 
 
Trade receivables 
16 
63.9 
- 
63.9 
60.9 
-
60.9 
Pension escrow account 
16 
- 
8.6 
8.6 
- 
5.0
5.0 
Other Financial assets 
13 
4.9 
9.4 
14.3 
5.0 
8.9
13.9 
Cash and cash equivalents 
17 
104.5 
- 
104.5 
120.1 
-
120.1 
Amounts owed from related parties 
16 
- 
22.0 
22.0 
22.0 
-
22.0 
 
173.3 
40.0 
213.3 
208.0 
13.9
221.9 
Financial liabilities 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Liabilities at amortised cost 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Trade payables and accruals 
19 
360.4 
- 
360.4 
392.5 
-
392.5 
Borrowings 
21 
953.9 
1,268.3 
2,222.2 
572.4 
1,656.8
2,229.2 
Lease liabilities 
20 
25.1 
465.6 
490.7 
26.8 
531.0
557.8 
Derivative financial instruments 
 
 
 
 
 
Designated as hedging instruments 
22 
1.0 
12.9 
13.9 
0.3 
30.4
30.7 
1,340.4 
1,746.8 
3,087.2 
992.0 
2,218.2
3,210.2 
 
Financial risk management 
The primary treasury objectives of the group are to identify and manage the financial risks that arise in relation to underlying business 
needs and provide secure and competitively priced funding for the activities of the group. If appropriate, the group uses financial 
instruments and derivatives to manage these risks. 
The principal financial instruments held for the purpose of raising finance for operations are bank loans and overdrafts, secured bonds 
and cash. Other financial instruments arise directly from the operations of the group, such as trade receivables, trade payables, trade 
loans and lease liabilities. 
Derivative financial instruments, interest rate swaps, are used to manage the interest rate risks related to the group’s operations and 
financing sources. No speculative trading in derivative financial instruments is undertaken. 
The main risks arising from the group’s financial instruments are interest rate risk, liquidity risk and credit risk. The policy for managing 
each of these risks is set out below. 
Derivatives 
The group has the following derivative financial instruments: 
Financial instruments qualifying for hedge accounting 
At 29 December 2024 the group held two (prior period: two) interest rate swap contracts. The group uses interest rate swaps to fix 
the interest rate payable on the floating rate tranches of its securitised debt. These swaps are hedges of the B1 and B2 tranches, receiving 
a variable rate of interest based on SONIA and paying a fixed rate of 5.155% on the B1 tranche and 4.837% on the B2 tranche. The 
weighted average fixed rate of the swaps was 5.0% (prior period: 5.0%). 
The interest rate swaps have the same critical terms as the associated securitised debts including payment dates, maturities and notional 
amounts (note 21). It is expected that the value of the interest rate swap contracts and the value of the corresponding hedged items will 
systematically change in the opposite direction in response to movements in the underlying interest rates. The hedge ratio is 1:1. Sources 
of ineffectiveness that might affect the hedging relationship are the counterparty’s credit risk, and changes in the timing and amount of 
the interest payments. Prospective hedge effectiveness testing is performed. The interest rate swaps have been assessed as highly effective 
during the period and are expected to remain highly effective over their remaining contract lives. The ineffectiveness during the period, 
which is recognised within finance costs, amounted to £nil (prior period: £nil).  
 
 
 
 
 
 

90 
Interest rate swaps designated as part of a hedging relationship 
29 December 2024 
£m 
31 December 2023
£m 
Carrying amount of hedging instruments (included within derivative financial instruments) 
13.9 
30.7 
Notional principal value of hedging instruments 
220.8 
220.8 
Nominal amount of hedged items 
220.8 
220.8 
Hedging reserve balance in respect of continuing hedges 
(10.4) 
(23.0) 
Hedging gains/(losses) recognised in other comprehensive income 
17.3 
(6.9) 
Amount reclassified from the hedging reserve to profit or loss in respect of continued hedges (included 
in finance cost) (see note 7) 
(0.5) 
0.6 
 
Hedging reserve 
29 December 2024 
£m 
31 December 2023 
£m 
Balance at beginning of period 
(23.0) 
(18.3) 
Hedging gains/(losses) recognised in other comprehensive income 
17.3 
(6.9) 
Amount reclassified from the hedging reserve to profit or loss 
(0.5) 
0.6 
Deferred tax on hedging reserve movements 
(4.2) 
1.6 
Balance at end of period 
(10.4) 
(23.0) 
Interest rate risk 
Exposure to changes in interest rates on the group’s borrowings is reviewed with regard to the maturity profile and cash flows of the 
underlying debt. The group uses a mixture of fixed and floating interest rate debt with exposure to market interest rate fluctuations primarily 
arising from the floating rate instruments. The group enters into interest rate swaps to manage the exposure. Both swaps are designated 
as cash flow hedges at the date of contract included within the accounts and tested for effectiveness at each reporting date. 
In accordance with IFRS 7, the group has undertaken sensitivity analysis on its financial instruments which are affected by changes in 
interest rates. This analysis has been prepared on the basis of a constant amount of net debt, a constant ratio of fixed to floating interest 
rates, and on the basis of the hedging instruments in place at 29 December 2024 and 31 December 2023. The analysis relates only to 
balances at these dates and is not representative of the period as a whole. The following assumptions were made: 
– 
Balance sheet sensitivity to interest rates applies only to derivative financial instruments, as the carrying value of debt and 
deposits does not change as interest rates move. 
– 
Gains and losses are recognised within other comprehensive income or the income statement in line with the accounting 
policies of the group. 
– 
Cash flow hedges were assumed to be effective or ineffective on the same basis as those as at the year end. 
 
Based on the group's net position at the year end, a 1% increase/decrease in interest rates would change the group's profit before tax 
by approximately £8.5m (prior period: £7.8m) and the group's OCI by £16.3m/£17.9m (prior period: £19.2m/£21.3m). An increase in 
interest rates would decrease (prior period: decrease) the group's profit and increase (prior period: increase) OCI. 
 
Whilst cash flow interest rate risk is largely eliminated, the use of fixed rate borrowings and derivative financial instruments exposes the 
group to fair value interest rate risk such that the group would not significantly benefit from falls in interest rates and would be exposed 
to unplanned costs, such as break costs, should debt or derivative financial instruments be restructured or repaid early. 
The percentage of net debt that was fixed as at the year end was 59.9% (prior period: 63.1%). 
Liquidity risk  
The group mitigates liquidity risk by managing cash generated by its operations combined with bank borrowings and long-term debt. The 
group’s objective is to maintain a balance between the continuity of funding and flexibility through the use of overdrafts and bank loans. 
The group also monitors the maturity of financial liabilities to avoid the risk of a shortage of funds. 
The standard payment terms that the group has with its suppliers is 60 days following month end (prior period: 60 days following month 
end). 
Excess cash used in managing liquidity is placed on interest-bearing deposit using instant-access money market deposit accounts. Short-
term flexibility is achieved through the use of short-term borrowing under the group’s revolving credit facilities. 
The table below summarises the maturity profile of the group’s financial liabilities at 29 December 2024 and 31 December 2023 based on 
contractual undiscounted payments including interest. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

91 Strategic Report | Corporate Governance | Financial Statements 
 
29 December 2024 
Within 1 year 
£m 
1–2 years 
£m 
2–5 years 
£m 
>5 years
£m
Total
£m
Interest bearing loans and borrowings: 
 
 
– Capital 
955.3 
152.5 
538.8 
584.2
2,230.8 
– Interest 
82.0 
61.5 
146.0 
97.9
387.4 
1,037.3 
214.0 
684.8 
682.1
2,618.2 
Interest rate swaps settled net 
1.0 
1.8 
6.6 
7.6 
17.0 
1,038.3 
215.8 
691.4 
689.7 
2,635.2 
Trade payables and accruals 
360.4 
- 
- 
- 
360.4 
Lease liabilities 
51.5 
52.2 
133.5 
540.4 
777.6 
1,450.2 
268.0
824.9 
1,230.1 
3,773.2 
 
 
 
 
 
31 December 2023 
Within 1 year 
£m 
1–2 years 
£m 
2–5 years 
£m 
>5 years
£m
Total
£m
Interest bearing loans and borrowings: 
 
 
– Capital 
573.8 
769.3 
227.7 
667.8 
2,238.6 
– Interest 
108.7 
64.2 
112.3 
119.5 
404.7 
682.5 
833.5 
340.0 
787.3 
2,643.3 
Interest rate swaps settled net 
0.3 
3.1 
13.6 
19.7 
36.7 
682.8 
836.6 
353.6 
807.0 
2,680.0 
Trade payables and accruals 
392.5 
- 
- 
- 
392.5 
Lease liabilities 
48.9 
47.6 
126.7 
714.0 
937.2 
1,124.2 
884.2
480.3 
1,521.0 
4,009.7 
Credit risk 
 
Financial assets include trade loans, cash and cash equivalents and trade receivables. Credit risk is the risk of default by the counterparty 
to discharge their obligation and the maximum exposure of the group is the carrying amount of these instruments. Other cash deposits 
and cash and cash equivalents are also subject to the impairment requirements of IFRS 9 however the impairment loss is immaterial. 
 
The policy for third party trading is that all customers who wish to trade on credit terms are subject to regular credit verification 
procedures. Receivable balances are also monitored on an ongoing basis and provided against were deemed necessary to limit the 
exposure to bad debts to a non-significant level. 
 
Security is held for certain free trade loan customers. No other significant collateral is held and there are no significant concentrations 
of credit risk within the group. 
 
Impairment of financial assets 
The group has three types of financial assets that are subject to the expected credit loss model: 
 
 
- trade receivables 
 
- amounts due from related parties  
 
- other financial assets (trade loans with publicans) held at amortised cost 
 
Impairment losses on amounts due from related parties are £nil (prior period: £nil). Impairment losses on other financial assets and trade 
receivables recognised in profit or loss were as follows: 
 
29 December 2024 
31 December 2023
 
£m 
£m
Non-adjusting: 
 
 
Impairment reversal on trade receivables 
- 
(0.6)
Impairment loss/(reversal) on other financial assets (trade loans with publicans) 
0.3 
(0.4)
 
0.3 
(1.0)
Adjusting: 
 
 
Impairment reversal on trade receivables 
- 
(0.1)
 
- 
(0.1)
 
0.3 
(1.1)
For more detail on adjusting items refer to note 5. 
Trade receivables 
An impairment analysis is performed at each reporting date using a provision matrix to measure the expected credit losses for trade 
receivables. The provision rates are based on days past due. The calculation reflects the probability-weighted outcome, the time value of 
money and reasonable and supportable information that is available at the reporting date about past events, current conditions and 
forecasts of future economic conditions. The group writes off a trade receivable when there is objective evidence that the debtor is in 
significant financial difficulty and there is no realistic prospect of recovery. 
 
 

92 
 
Set out below is the information about the credit risk exposure on the group's trade receivables using a provision matrix: 
29 December 2024 
31 December 2023 
Gross 
Provision 
Net 
Gross 
Provision 
Net 
£m 
£m 
£m 
£m 
£m 
£m 
Not past due 
63.5 
(2.3) 
61.2 
58.7 
(2.4) 
56.3 
Past due  
 
 
 
 
 
 
– Less than 30 days 
1.3 
(0.3) 
1.0 
2.3 
(0.2) 
2.1 
– 30-60 days 
0.9 
(0.5) 
0.4 
0.9 
(0.3) 
0.6 
– Greater than 60 days 
4.3 
(3.0) 
1.3 
6.2 
(4.3) 
1.9 
70.0 
(6.1) 
63.9 
68.1 
(7.2) 
60.9 
Financial assets 
The group measures expected credit losses for financial assets held at amortised cost by keeping a system that identifies debts that are 
at a high risk of non-recovery. Once the debts are moved into this system, the risk related to the debt is considered to have significantly 
increased. The criteria considered by the system are customers who have both sales and debt unpaid, and customers that have stopped 
trading with the group but have an outstanding balance. For the loans considered to be at high risk of non-recovery a lifetime expected 
loss is calculated. 
 
Set out below is the movement in the allowance for expected credit losses of trade receivables and other financial assets held at amortised 
cost: 
Trade receivables 
Other financial assets 
29 December 2024 
31 December 2023 
29 December 2024 
31 December 2023
£m 
£m 
£m 
£m
As at beginning of period 
(7.2) 
(7.5) 
(3.2) 
(3.6) 
Unused amounts reversed 
0.4 
0.3 
- 
0.4 
Provision for expected credit losses recognised during the year 
(0.4) 
(1.0) 
            (0.3) 
- 
Provision utilised 
1.1 
1.0 
- 
- 
As at end of period 
(6.1) 
(7.2) 
(3.5) 
(3.2) 
Further information on the group’s expected credit loss methodology can be found in note 2. 
Fair values 
Set out in the table below is a comparison of carrying amounts and fair values of certain of the group's financial instruments in accordance 
with the requirements of IFRS 7 and IFRS 13. The fair values of the financial assets and liabilities are included at the amount at which the 
instrument could be exchanged in a current transaction between willing parties, other than in a forced liquidation or sale. IFRS 13 requires 
that the classification of financial instruments at fair value be determined by reference to the source of inputs used to derive fair value.  
The classification uses the following three-level hierarchy: 
Level 1 - unadjusted quoted prices in active markets for identical assets or liabilities. 
Level 2 - other techniques for which all inputs which have a significant effect on the recorded fair value are observable, either directly or 
indirectly. 
Level 3 - techniques which use inputs which have a significant effect on the recorded fair value that are not based on observable market 
data. 
 
Fair value 
 
Carrying value
 
Fair value 
 
Carrying value 
Hierarchical 
 
29 December
2024
 
29 December
2024
 
31 December 
2023 
 
31 December 
2023 
classification 
£m
£m
£m 
£m
Financial liabilities 
 
 
 
Interest-bearing loans and borrowings 
 
 
 
Secured debt Issued by Greene King 
Finance plc  
Level 1  
(884.9)
(957.8)
(926.6)
(1,019.5) 
Bank loans 
Level 2 
(955.0)
(953.4)
(900.0)
(898.7) 
Loans from related parties 
Level 2 
(311.0)
(311.0)
(297.1)
(311.0) 
Interest rate swaps 
Level 2 
(13.9)
(13.9)
(30.7)
(30.7) 
Financial assets 
 
Other financial assets 
Level 3 
14.3
14.3
13.9
13.9 
 
 
 
 
Carrying values of the secured debt issued by Greene King Finance plc are stated net of deferred finance fees of £7.0m (prior period: 
£8.0m).  
Carrying values of bank loans are stated net of deferred finance fees of £1.6m (prior period: £1.3m).  
 
 

93 Strategic Report | Corporate Governance | Financial Statements 
 
 
Fair value of the financial assets and financial liabilities that are measured at fair value on a recurring basis 
The only financial liabilities measured subsequently at fair value are interest rate swaps. The fair value of the instruments classified as 
Level 2 was calculated by discounting all future cash flows by the market yield curve at the balance sheet date and adjusting for, where 
appropriate, the group’s and counterparty credit risk. Changes in credit risk had no material effect on the hedge effectiveness assessment 
for derivatives designated in hedge relationships. During the periods ending 29 December 2024 and 31 December 2023 there were no 
transfers between fair value levels 1, 2 or 3.  
Fair value of financial assets and financial liabilities that are not measured at fair value (but fair value disclosures 
are required) 
 
The following methods were used to estimate the fair values: 
 
- 
Interest-bearing loans and borrowings - based on quoted market prices in the case of the secured debt; approximates 
to the carrying amount (adjusted to exclude capitalised fees) in the case of bank loans.  
- 
Non-interest-bearing borrowings – fair value is equal to carrying value  
- 
Financial assets - these are carried at amortised cost using the effective interest method and fair value is deemed to 
be the same as this. 
Capital risk management 
The group aims to maintain strong credit ratings and a core level of debt which optimise the weighted average cost of capital (WACC). 
A number of mechanisms are used to manage net debt and equity levels (together referred to as capital) as disclosed on the balance 
sheet, as appropriate in light of economic and trading conditions. To maintain or adjust the capital structure, the group may adjust 
distributions to its immediate parent or issue new share capital to its immediate parent. 
The group monitors capital using several measures including fixed charge cover, the ratio of net debt to EBITDA and free cash flow debt 
service coverage. All financial covenants in relation the securitisation vehicles have been fully complied with. 
 
23 PROVISIONS 
Property leases 
£m 
       
Restructuring 
£m 
    
 
At 1 January 2023 
8.1
-
 
Provided for  
1.5
-
 
Released  
(1.8)
-
 
Utilised  
(1.1)
-
 
At 31 December 2023 
6.7                                                - 
 
Provided for  
1.8
     11.0 
Released  
(2.4)
-
Utilised  
(0.4)
(4.3)
At 29 December 2024 
5.7
6.7
Provisions have been analysed between current and non-current as follows: 
 
 
 
29 December 2024 
31 December 2023 
£m 
£m 
Current 
10.9 
5.9 
Non-current 
1.5 
0.8 
12.4 
6.7 
 
Property leases 
The provision for property leases has been set up to cover dilapidation requirements and potential liabilities on assigned leases.  
The provision represents management best estimate of the properties expected to be exited within the next 2 years and the expected 
cost to repair the site based on either the contractual dilapidation amount or an estimate based on historical actual dilapidation costs 
and external surveyor reports.  
Restructuring 
The restructuring provision relates to costs incurred as a result of the restructure announced in Q4 2024; phase 1 of the restructuring 
completed pre-year end and phase 2 is expected to conclude during H1 2025. The provision for restructuring has been recognised as an 
adjusting item in the income statement.  
 

94 
 
24 SHARE CAPITAL 
29 December 2024 
31 December 2023 
Number of 
issued shares  
m 
Share capital 
 
£m 
Number of 
issued shares 
m 
Share capital 
 
£m 
Ordinary shares of 12.5p each – called up, allotted and 
fully paid 
 
 
At beginning of period 
312.1 
39.0 
312.1 
39.0 
At end of period 
312.1 
39.0 
312.1 
39.0 
25 RESERVES 
Share premium account 
Share premium represents the excess of proceeds received over the nominal value of new shares issued.  
Merger reserve 
The merger reserve represents capital contributions received, and amounts recognised on the acquisition of Spirit Pub Company Limited 
being the difference between the value of the consideration and the nominal value of the shares issued as consideration.  
Capital redemption reserve 
The capital redemption reserve arose from the purchase and cancellation of own share capital and represents the nominal amount of the 
share capital cancelled. 
Hedging reserve 
Hedging reserve adjustments arise from the movement in fair value of the group's derivative instruments used as an effective hedge, in 
line with the accounting policy disclosed in note 2. Amounts recycled to income are included within finance costs in the income statement.  
Goodwill 
The cumulative amount of goodwill written off to retained earnings in respect of acquisitions made prior to May 1998 amounts to £89.7m.  
 
26 WORKING CAPITAL AND ADJUSTING CASH ITEMS 
 
29 December 2024 
31 December 2023 
£m 
£m 
Decrease/(increase) in inventories 
5.0 
(7.2) 
Increase in trade and other receivables 
(2.8) 
(6.5) 
Increase in trade and other payables 
3.5 
61.7 
Decrease in property provisions 
(0.4) 
(1.4) 
Other non-cash movement 
(0.3) 
(0.4) 
Defined benefit pension contributions paid 
(3.2) 
(3.5) 
Adjusting items 
(10.1) 
25.0 
Working capital and adjusting cash items  
(8.3) 
67.7 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

95 Strategic Report | Corporate Governance | Financial Statements 
 
27 ANALYSIS AND MOVEMENTS IN NET DEBT 
 
As at 
Cash flow   
 
Changes in Other non- 
 
As at 
 
31 December 2023 
movements 
in the 
period2 
fair value³ cash changes 
29 December 
2024 
 
£m 
£m 
£m 
£m 
£m 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Cash at bank and in hand1 
 
120.1 
 
(15.6) 
 
- 
 
- 
 
104.5 
Cash and cash equivalents for balance sheet 
120.1 
(15.6) 
- 
- 
104.5 
Overdrafts  
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
Cash and cash equivalents for cash flow 
120.1 
(15.6) 
- 
- 
104.5 
Liabilities from financing activities 
 
 
 
 
 
Included in net debt: 
 
 
 
 
 
– Bank loans: 
 
 
 
 
 
   - Revolving loans 
(818.8) 
245.3 
- 
(1.0) 
(574.5) 
   - Term loans 
(79.9) 
(298.9) 
- 
(0.1) 
(378.9) 
– Other loans: 
 
 
 
 
 
   - Loans from related parties            
(311.0) 
- 
- 
- 
(311.0) 
– Securitised borrowing 
(1,019.5) 
62.8 
- 
(1.1) 
(957.8) 
(2,229.2) 
9.2 
- 
(2.2) 
(2,222.2) 
Not included in net debt: 
 
 
 
 
 
– Derivative financial instruments 
(30.7) 
- 
16.8 
- 
(13.9) 
– Lease liabilities4 
(557.8) 
30.9 
- 
36.2 
(490.7) 
Liabilities from financing activities 
(2,817.7) 
40.1 
16.8 
34.0 
(2,726.8) 
 
 
 
 
 
Net debt including derivatives and lease liabilities  
(2,697.6) 
24.5 
16.8 
34.0 
(2,622.3) 
Net debt excluding derivatives and lease liabilities 
(2,109.1) 
(6.4) 
- 
(2.2) 
(2,117.7) 
1. Includes short-term deposits. 
2. Excludes interest payments on borrowings, which are recognised within 'cash flows from operating activities' in the group cash flow statement. 
3. Includes the impact on the fair value of derivatives of scheduled interest payments which are recognised within 'cash flows from operating activities' in the group cash flow statement. 
4. Other non-cash changes on Lease Liabilities incorporates £35.1m additions, £(63.1)m remeasurements, £(7.1)m disposals and £(1.1)m transfer to property. 
  
 
As at 
Cash flow   
Changes in Other non- 
 
As at 
 
1 January 
2023 
movements 
in the 
period2 
fair value³ cash changes 
31 December 
2023 
 
£m 
£m 
£m 
£m 
£m 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Cash at bank and in hand1 
 
87.5 
 
32.6 
 
- 
 
- 
 
120.1 
Cash and cash equivalents for balance sheet 
87.5 
32.6 
- 
- 
120.1 
Overdrafts  
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
Cash and cash equivalents for cash flow 
87.5 
32.6 
- 
- 
120.1 
Liabilities from financing activities 
 
 
 
 
 
Included in net debt: 
 
 
 
 
 
– Bank loans: 
 
 
 
 
 
   - Revolving loans 
(738.0) 
(80.0) 
- 
(0.8) 
(818.8) 
   - Term loans 
(79.8) 
- 
- 
(0.1) 
(79.9) 
– Other loans: 
 
 
 
 
 
   - Revolving loans from related parties            
(311.0) 
- 
- 
- 
(311.0) 
– Securitised borrowing 
(1,073.7) 
55.4 
- 
(1.2) 
(1,019.5) 
(2,202.5) 
(24.6) 
- 
(2.1) 
(2,229.2) 
Not included in net debt: 
 
 
 
 
 
– Derivative financial instruments 
(24.4) 
- 
(6.3) 
- 
(30.7) 
– Lease liabilities4 
(564.3) 
29.9 
- 
(23.4) 
(557.8) 
Liabilities from financing activities 
(2,791.2) 
5.3 
(6.3) 
(25.5) 
(2,817.7) 
 
 
 
 
 
Net debt including derivatives and lease liabilities  
(2,703.7) 
37.9 
(6.3) 
(25.5) 
(2,697.6) 
Net debt excluding derivatives and lease liabilities 
(2,115.0) 
8.0 
- 
(2.1) 
(2,109.1) 
1. Includes short-term deposits. 
2. Excludes interest payments on borrowings, which are recognised within 'cash flows from operating activities' in the group cash flow statement. 
3. Includes the impact on the fair value of derivatives of scheduled interest payments which are recognised within 'cash flows from operating activities' in the group cash flow statement. 
4. Other non-cash changes on Lease Liabilities incorporates £23.1m additions, £10.5m remeasurements, £(5.8)m disposals, £(4.8)m transfer to property, plant and equipment and £0.4m lease concessions. 
concessions. 

96 
28 OPERATING LEASE ARRANGEMENTS  
The group leases part of its licensed estate and other non-licensed properties to tenants. The majority of lease agreements have terms 
of between six months and 25 years and are classified for accounting purposes as operating leases. Most of the leases with terms of over 
three years include provision for rent reviews on either a three year or five-year basis. 
 
 
Future minimum cash rentals receivable under non-cancellable operating leases are 
as follows: 
 
 
29 December 2024 
31 December 2023 
£m 
£m 
Within one year 
37.3 
36.7 
Between one and two years 
33.7 
31.0 
Between two and three years 
27.2 
27.7 
Between three and four years 
21.8 
21.3 
Between four and five years 
17.2 
15.9 
After five years 
97.9 
100.3 
235.1 
232.9 
 
29 RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS 
Since the acquisition, the group has entered into transactions with companies connected to CK Asset Holdings Limited, its ultimate 
parent undertaking in the period. These have been disclosed below: 
 
Transaction values 
Balances outstanding 
29 December 2024 
 
31 December 2023 
29 December 2024 
 
31 December 2023 
£m 
£m 
£m 
£m 
CKA Holdings UK Limited 
Revolving Loan Facility  
- 
- 
- 
(311.0) 
Interest expense and accrued interest 
(8.7) 
(8.4) 
- 
(2.1) 
Loan advance 
- 
- 
(311.0) 
- 
 
 
 
 
 
The unsecured Revolving Credit Facility has a fixed interest rate of 7.0% and matures in November 2028, with any amounts outstanding 
on maturity payable in November 2028.  
The loan advance of £311.0m (prior period: £nil) is repayable on demand and bears a 0% interest rate. 
 
 
 
 
CK Noble (UK) Limited 
 
 
 
 
Amounts owed to Greene King Limited 
- 
- 
22.0
22.0 
 
 
 
Social Healthcare Group Limited 
 
 
 
Amounts owed to Greene King Limited 
- 
- 
- 
- 
Group relief  
- 
(0.4) 
- 
- 
 
 
 
 
Hutchison 3G UK Limited 
 
 
 
 
Rental income of base stations  
0.1 
0.1 
- 
- 
Provision of internet and telecommunication 
services  
(0.3) 
(0.2) 
- 
- 
 
 
 
 
UK Power Network 
 
 
 
 
Provision of utilities 
(0.2) 
(0.3) 
- 
- 
 
 
 
 
Northumbrian Water Limited 
 
 
 
 
Supply of water  
(0.5) 
(0.4) 
- 
- 
Total 
(0.9) 
(1.2) 
22.0 
22.0 
Greene King Finance plc is a structured entity set up to raise bond finance for the group, and as such is deemed to be a related party. 
The results and financial position of the entity has been consolidated in the group's results. 
Details of the remuneration for the key management personnel services are given in note 6.  
 

97 Strategic Report | Corporate Governance | Financial Statements 
 
30 POST BALANCE SHEET EVENTS 
Post year end the group refinanced £80m of their term loans and £120m of its revolving credit facility, the total facility remains at £200m 
and now consists of a £100m term loan and £100m revolving credit facility. The group further renewed one of its revolving credit facilities, 
the facility size remains at £200m.  
31 ULTIMATE PARENT COMPANY 
At 29 December 2024 the directors consider the immediate parent undertaking and immediate controlling party of Greene King Limited 
to be CK Noble (UK) Limited, a company incorporated in the UK. Registered at 3 More London Riverside, London, United Kingdom. 
The ultimate parent undertaking and ultimate controlling party is CK Asset Holdings Limited, a company registered in the Cayman Islands 
and registered in Hong Kong, with its shares listed on the Main Board of the Hong Kong Stock Exchange.  
 
The smallest group financial statements produced which include the results of the company are for Greene King Limited, which are these 
financial statements. CK Asset Holdings Limited is the largest group which includes the results of the company and for which group 
financial statements are prepared. Copies of its group financial statements are available from 7th Floor, Cheung Kong Center, 2 Queen's 
Road Central, Hong Kong. 
 
 
 

98 
COMPANY BALANCE SHEET 
AS AT 29 DECEMBER 2024 
Registered number: 00024511 
 
 
Note 
  
29 December 2024 
£m 
   
31 December 2023 
£m 
Fixed assets 
 
 
Investments 
35 
4,197.1 
4,068.7 
Current assets 
 
 
 
Debtors 
36 
115.8 
110.9 
Cash and cash equivalents  
 
- 
- 
Creditors: amounts falling due within one year 
37 
(1,042.7) 
(556.3) 
 
 
 
 
Net current liabilities 
 
(926.9) 
(445.4) 
Total assets less current liabilities 
 
3,270.2 
3,623.3 
 
 
 
 
Creditors: amounts falling due after more than one year 
38 
(378.7) 
(698.9) 
 
 
 
 
Net assets 
 
2,891.5 
2,924.4 
Capital and reserves 
 
 
 
Called up share capital 
40 
39.0 
39.0 
Share premium account 
41 
1,184.4 
1,184.4 
Merger reserve 
41 
752.0 
752.0 
Revaluation reserve 
41 
2.5 
2.5 
Other reserve 
41 
93.9 
93.9 
Retained earnings¹ 
819.7 
852.6 
Equity attributable to owners of the parent 
2,891.5 
2,924.4 
 
1 The profit and loss account of the parent company is omitted from the company's accounts by virtue of the exemption granted by section 408 of the Companies Act 
2006. The loss generated in the period for ordinary shareholders and included in the financial statements of the parent company, amounted to £32.9m (prior period: profit 
£514.8m). 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Signed on behalf of the board and authorised for issue on 24 April 2025 
 
 
Richard Smothers 
Director 

99 Strategic Report | Corporate Governance | Financial Statements 
 
COMPANY STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY 
FOR THE 52 WEEKS ENDED 29 DECEMBER 2024 
 
 
Called up 
share capital 
Share 
premium 
account 
Merger 
reserve 
Revaluation 
reserve 
Other 
reserve 
Retained 
earnings 
Total 
£m 
£m 
£m 
£m 
£m 
£m 
£m 
At 1 January 2023 
39.0 
1,184.4 
752.0 
2.5 
93.9 
337.8 
2,409.6 
Profit for the period 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
514.8 
514.8 
Total 
comprehensive 
income  
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
514.8 
514.8 
At 31 December 2023 
39.0 
1,184.4 
752.0 
2.5 
93.9 
852.6 
2,924.4 
Loss for the period 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
(32.9) 
(32.9) 
Total 
comprehensive 
loss  
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
(32.9) 
(32.9) 
At 29 December 2024 
39.0 
1,184.4 
752.0 
2.5 
93.9 
819.7 
819.7 
 

100 
NOTES TO THE COMPANY ACCOUNTS 
FOR THE 52 WEEKS ENDED 29 DECEMBER 2024 
 
32 ACCOUNTING POLICIES 
Basis of accounting and presentation 
The financial statements have been prepared under the historical cost convention and in accordance with applicable UK accounting 
standards. 
The company meets the definition of a qualifying entity under FRS 100 Application of Financial Reporting Requirements as issued by the 
Financial Reporting Council (FRC). The financial statements have therefore been prepared in accordance with FRS 101 Reduced 
Disclosure Framework. 
The company has taken advantage of the following disclosure exemptions under FRS 101: 
– the requirements of IAS 7: Statement of Cash Flows; 
– the requirements of IAS 8: Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors; to disclose IFRSs issued but 
not effective; 
– the requirements of IFRS 2: Share-based payments (paragraphs 45(b) and 46 to 52); 
– the requirements of IFRS 7: Financial Instruments: Disclosures; 
– the requirements of IFRS 13: Fair Value Measurements; 
– the requirements of IAS 24: Related Party Disclosures (to present key management personnel compensation and 
intragroup transactions including wholly owned subsidiaries); and 
– the requirements of IAS 1: Presentation of Financial Statements, to present certain comparative information and capital 
management disclosures. 
 
Where required, equivalent disclosures are included in the consolidated financial statements of the group in which the entity is 
consolidated. 
Greene King Limited is a private company limited by shares incorporated and domiciled in England and Wales. The address of its registered 
office is Westgate Brewery, Bury St. Edmunds, Suffolk, IP33 1QT. 
The Company’s principal activities are as a holding company and in the provision of financing, via intercompany loans to fellow group 
undertakings. 
Investments 
Investments in subsidiaries are recorded at cost less impairment and held as fixed assets on the balance sheet. The carrying value of 
investments is reviewed for impairment if events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying value may not be recoverable. On 
transition to FRS 101, the previous GAAP carrying amount at the date of transition was regarded as deemed cost. 
Taxation 
Corporation tax payable is provided on taxable profits using the tax rates and laws that have been enacted or substantively enacted by the 
balance sheet date. 
Financial instruments 
Financial instruments are recognised when the company becomes party to the contractual provisions of the instrument and are 
derecognised when the company no longer controls the contractual rights that comprise the financial instrument, normally through sale or 
when all cash flows attributable to the instrument are passed to an independent third party. 
Financial assets 
The company classifies its amounts due from subsidiaries at amortised cost where the objective is to hold these assets in order to collect 
contractual cash flows and the contractual cash flows are solely payments of principal and interest. They are initially recognised at fair value 
plus transaction costs and are subsequently carried at amortised cost using the effective interest rate method less provision for impairment. 
The company recognises a loss allowance for expected credit losses on amounts due from subsidiaries. The methodology used to determine 
the amount of the expected credit loss is based on whether there has been a significant increase in credit risk since initial recognition of the 
financial asset. 
For those where the credit risk has not increased significantly since initial recognition of the financial asset, twelve month expected credit 
losses along with gross interest income are recognised. For those where the credit risk has increased significantly or determined to be credit 
impaired, lifetime expected credit losses along with the gross interest income or net interest income, respectively, are recognised.

101 Strategic Report | Corporate Governance | Financial Statements 
 
Borrowings 
All loans and borrowings are initially recognised at fair value of the consideration received, net of issue costs. After initial recognition, interest- 
bearing loans and borrowings are measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method. 
Critical accounting judgments and key sources of estimation uncertainty 
The preparation of financial statements requires management to make judgments, estimates and assumptions in the application of 
accounting policies that affect reported amounts of assets and liabilities, income and expense. The company bases its estimates and 
judgments on historical experience and other factors deemed reasonable under the circumstances, including any expectations of future 
events. Actual results may differ from these estimates. The company had no significant judgements in the period.  
Critical accounting estimates 
Impairment of loans to subsidiaries 
The company recognised a loss allowance for expected credit losses on amounts owed by group undertakings. The methodology 
used to determine the amount of credit loss is based on whether there has been a significant increase in credit risk since in itial 
recognition of the financial asset.  
 
 
A review was carried out on amounts owed by group undertakings for an indication of a significant increase in credit risk. The main 
criteria used was to compare the risk of default occurring over the expected life of the instrument at the reporting date with the risk 
of default at the date of initial recognition. This review concluded that given the Greene King Limited group liquidity remained strong 
a 12-month ECL remained applicable for all unsecured balances whilst secured balances have been provided on remaining length of 
the loan. 
 
Impairment of investments in subsidiaries 
Determining whether the company's investments in subsidiaries have been impaired requires estimations of the investments' value in 
use. The value in use calculations require the entity to estimate the future cash flows expected to arise from the investments and 
suitable discount rates in order to calculate present values. The carrying amount of investments in subsidiaries at the balance sheet 
date was £2,449.3m (prior period: £2,543.9m) with net impairment charge in the year of £94.6m (prior period: £221.5m). 
33 AUDITOR’S REMUNERATION 
Auditor’s remuneration for the audit of the financial statements was £39,500 (prior period: £39,500). The figures for auditor’s remuneration 
for the company required by regulation 5(1)(b) of the Companies (Disclosure of Auditor Remuneration and Liability Limitation Agreements) 
Regulations 2008 are not presented here as the group accounts comply with this regulation on a consolidated basis. 
34 DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION AND EMPLOYEE COSTS 
The company has no employees other than directors and the directors are not remunerated through this company. Details of employee 
costs are given in note 6. 
35 INVESTMENTS 
Investments in 
subsidiaries 
Loans to 
subsidiaries 
 
Total 
           £m 
£m 
£m 
Cost at 31 December 2023 
2,755.3 
1,528.4 
4,283.7 
Additions 
- 
222.2 
222.2 
Cost at 29 December 2024 
2,755.3 
1,750.6 
4,505.9 
 
 
 
 
Impairment at 31 December 2023 
(211.4) 
(3.6)
(215.0) 
Impairment of non-trading subsidiaries 
(94.6) 
- 
(94.6) 
Expected credit losses reversed 
- 
0.8 
0.8 
Impairment at 29 December 2024 
(306.0) 
(2.8)
(308.8) 
 
NBV at 29 December 2024 
 
2,449.3 
 
1,747.8 
 
4,197.1 
NBV at 31 December 2023 
2,543.9 
1,524.8 
4,068.7 
The net impairment charge of £94.6m (prior period: £221.5m) is made up of an impairment charge of £94.6m (prior period: £221.5m) 
and an impairment reversal of £nil (prior period: £nil).  
Interest on amounts owed from subsidiaries accrued at a rate equal to SONIA plus a credit adjustment spread during the period. Interest 
accrues half yearly and amounts owed from subsidiaries are repayable on demand.  
Principal subsidiaries 
For a full list of all subsidiaries see note 14. 
 
 
 
 

102 
36 DEBTORS 
 
 
29 December 2024 
£m 
 
31 December 2023
£m
Amounts owed from subsidiaries 
93.8 
88.9
Amounts owed from parent undertaking 
21.9 
21.9
Interest receivable 
0.1 
0.1
115.8 
110.9
Interest on amounts owed from subsidiaries accrues at a rate of SONIA plus a credit adjustment spread. Interest accrues half yearly and 
amounts owed from subsidiaries are repayable on demand. Amounts owed from parent undertaking are non-interest bearing. Expected 
credit losses of £3.0m (prior period: £3.8m) have been recognised against the carrying value of amounts owed from subsidiaries. 
Information about the group’s exposure to credit and market risks, and impairment losses for trade receivables is included in note 22. 
37 CREDITORS: AMOUNTS FALLING DUE WITHIN ONE YEAR  
29 December 2024 
31 December 2023 
£m 
£m
Accruals 
8.5 
12.1
Amounts owed to subsidiaries 
121.7 
-
Bank and other loans (note 39) 
885.7 
510.8
Bank overdraft 
26.8 
33.4
1,042.7 
556.3
 
 
 
 
39 LOANS AND OTHER BORROWINGS 
29 December 2024 
31 December 2023 
Within one 
year 
After one 
year 
 
Total 
Within one 
year 
After one 
year 
 
Total 
£m 
£m 
£m 
£m 
£m 
£m 
Bank overdraft  
26.8 
- 
26.8 
33.4
-
33.4 
Bank loans: 
 
 
 
– Revolving loans 
494.7 
79.8 
574.5 
199.8
619.0
818.8 
– Term loans 
80.0 
298.9 
378.9 
-
79.9
79.9 
Other loans 
 
 
 
– Revolving loans from related parties 
- 
- 
- 
311.0
-
311.0 
      – Loan advance 
311.0 
- 
311.0 
912.5 
378.7 
1,291.2 
544.2
698.9
1,243.1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
As explained in note 21, the company has available revolving bank credit facilities and term facilities totalling £1,100m of which, £955m was
drawn down at the year end with a carrying value of £953.4m which included £1.6m of fees.  
 
Bank loans due after one year are repayable as follows: 
29 December 2024 
£m 
31 December 2023 
£m 
Due within one year 
Due between two and five years 
574.5 
378.9 
199.8 
698.9 
953.4 
898.7 
Although any individual drawdowns under the bank revolving loans are repayable within 12 months of the balance sheet date, immediate 
renewal is available until the maturity of the facilities which fall between March 2025 and December 2026. The drawn amount under the 
term loans are repayable on maturity of the facilities between February 2025 and December 2029. Other loans are repayable as follows: 
 
38 CREDITORS: AMOUNTS FALLING DUE AFTER MORE THAN ONE YEAR 
29 December 2024 
£m 
31 December 2023
£m
Bank and other loans (note 39) 
378.7 
698.9
378.7 
698.9

103 Strategic Report | Corporate Governance | Financial Statements 
 
29 December 2024 
£m 
31 December 2023 
£m 
Due within one year 
311.0 
311.0 
Due between two and five years 
- 
- 
311.0 
311.0 
The group has available an unsecured revolving loan facility with CKA Holdings UK Limited, an intermediate parent. The facility is available 
to be used for general corporate purposes. Of the £1,500.0m (prior period: £1,500.0m) available under the facility, £nil (prior period: 
£311.0m) was drawn down at the year end with a carrying value of £nil (prior period: £311.0m). Any amounts drawn down bear interest 
at a fixed rate of 7.0%. Interest is payable following the end of each interest period which are typically 3 months in length. Drawn amounts 
are repayable on maturity of the facility in November 2028. The group has further received a loan advance of £311.0m (prior period: 
£nil) from CKA Holdings UK Limited. This is repayable on demand and bears a 0% interest rate. 
 
40 ALLOTTED AND ISSUED SHARE CAPITAL 
Allotted, called up and fully paid 
29 December 2024 
£m 
31 December 2023 
£m 
Ordinary shares of 12.5p each 
 
312.1m shares (prior period: 312.1m) 
39.0 
39.0 
Further information on share capital is given in note 24. 
 
41 RESERVES 
Share premium account 
Share premium represents the excess of proceeds received over the nominal value of new shares issued.  
Merger reserve 
The merger reserve represents capital contributions received, and amounts recognised on the acquisition of Spirit Pub Company Limited 
being the difference between the value of the consideration and the nominal value of the shares issued as consideration. 
Other reserve 
The other reserve consists of £3.3m (prior period: £3.3m) capital redemption reserve arising from the purchase of own share capital and 
£90.6m (prior period: £90.6m) arising from transfer of revalued assets to other group companies and will only be realised when the 
related assets are disposed of by the group. 
 
42 CONTINGENT LIABILITIES 
The company has provided a guarantee to the Greene King Pension Scheme in respect of the payment obligations to the scheme of its 
subsidiary Greene King Services Limited. In the event that these obligations are not met the company will become liable for amounts due 
to the pension scheme; such an event is not considered probable. 
Details of the group’s pension schemes are included in note 8. 
 
43 POST BALANCE SHEET EVENTS 
Post year end the company refinanced £80m of their term loans and £120m of its revolving credit facility, the total facility remains at 
£200m and now consists of a £100m term loan and £100m revolving credit facility. The company further renewed one of its revolving 
credit facilities, the facility size remains at £200m.  
 
44 ULTIMATE PARENT COMPANY 
At 29 December 2024, the directors consider the immediate parent undertaking and immediate controlling party of Greene King Limited 
to be CK Noble (UK) Limited, a company incorporated in the UK. 
The ultimate parent undertaking and ultimate controlling party is CK Asset Holdings Limited, a company registered in the Cayman Islands 
with its headquarters and principal place of business in Hong Kong. The company’s shares are listed on the Main Board of the Hong Kong 
Stock Exchange. 
The smallest group financial statements produced which include the results of the company are for Greene King Limited, which are these 
financial statements. CK Asset Holdings Limited is the largest group which includes the results of the company and for which group 
financial statements are prepared. Copies of its group financial statements are available from 7th Floor, Cheung Kong Center, 2 Queen's 
Road Central, Hong Kong. 
 
 

104 
ALTERNATIVE PERFORMANCE MEASURES  
The performance of the group is assessed using a number of alternative performance measures (APMs).  
The group's results are presented both before and after adjusting items. Adjusted profitability measures are presented excluding adjusting 
items as management believe this provides useful additional information about the group's performance and aids a more effective 
comparison of the group’s trading performance from one period to the next and with similar businesses. Adjusted profitability measures 
are reconciled to unadjusted IFRS results on the face of the income statement with details of adjusting items provided in note 5.  
In addition, the group's results are described using certain other measures that are not defined under IFRS and are therefore considered 
to be APMs. These measures are used by management to monitor ongoing business performance against both shorter-term budgets and 
forecasts but also against the group's longer-term strategic plans.  
APMs used to explain and monitor group performance are found below, including a reconciliation to the nearest measure prepared in 
accordance with IFRS: 
APM 
Definition 
Purpose 
Source 
Adjusted cash from operations 
Cash from operations before 
adjusting cash items  
Cash from operations before 
adjusting cash items as set out 
in note F below. Adjusting cash 
items are those which are 
separately identified by virtue 
of their size or incidence. 
Excluding these items allows an 
understanding of the cash 
generated from operations of 
the Group.  
See below  
Adjusted operating profit 
Operating 
profit 
before 
adjusting items 
Operating 
profit 
before 
separately disclosed items as 
set out in the Group Income 
Statement.  
Separately disclosed items are 
those which are separately 
identified by virtue of their size 
or incidence. Excluding these 
items allows an understanding 
of the trading of the Group. 
Group income statement 
Adjusted tax 
Tax 
(charge)/credit 
before 
adjusting items 
Tax 
before 
separately 
disclosed items as set out in 
the Group Income Statement. 
Separately disclosed items are 
those which are separately 
identified by virtue of their size 
or incidence. Excluding these 
items allows an understanding 
of the trading of the Group. 
Group income statement 
Adjusted net finance costs 
Net 
finance 
costs 
before 
adjusting items 
Net Finance costs before 
separately disclosed items as 
set out in the Group Income 
Statement.  
Separately disclosed items are 
those which are separately 
identified by virtue of their size 
or incidence. Excluding these 
items allows an understanding 
of the trading of the Group. 
Group income statement 
Adjusted EBITDA 
Earnings before interest, tax, 
depreciation, amortisation and 
adjusting items 
EBITDA 
before 
separately 
disclosed 
items. 
Separately 
disclosed items are those 
which are separately identified 
by virtue of their size or 
incidence. 
Excluding 
these 
items allows an understanding 
of the trading of the Group. 
See below 
Capital investment 
The purchase of property, 
plant and equipment split 
between core capex and brand 
swap and new site investment 
Capital investment provides 
clarity of the split between 
what is deemed to be core 
capital expenditure to allow an 
understanding of the capital 
investments made. 
Group cash flow statement 

105 Strategic Report | Corporate Governance | Financial Statements 
 
Core Capex 
Capital expenditure including 
asset 
optimisation 
but 
excluding freehold reversions, 
investment property, new site 
acquisitions and investment on 
acquisitions. 
Core Capex provides a greater 
understanding 
of 
the 
investments into long-term 
assets which will facilitate 
growth into the future. 
See below 
Like for like (LFL) sales  
LFL sales include revenue from 
the sale of drink, food and 
accommodation but exclude 
fruit machine income. LFL sales 
performance 
is 
calculated 
against a comparable period. 
LFL sales provides better 
insight 
into 
the 
trading 
performance 
than 
total 
revenue which is impacted by 
in 
year 
activities. 
  
Non-GAAP 
Free cash flow (FCF) 
FCF represents the net cash 
inflow 
from 
operating 
activities, adjusted for cash 
movements on working capital, 
adjusting items, tax, interest, 
core Capex and repayment of 
loans and lease liabilities 
The calculation of free cash 
flow is based on the net cash 
generated by business activities 
and available for investment, 
after funding working capital, 
adjusting items, corporation 
tax, interest, lease liabilities 
and trade loans. 
See below 
Net debt 
Net debt is the sum of cash and 
cash equivalents and other 
cash 
deposits, 
less 
total 
borrowings net of related 
accrued interest at the balance 
sheet date.  
Net debt excluding derivative 
financial instruments and lease 
liabilities provides a useful 
measure 
of 
the 
financing 
position of the group. 
Note 27 
Net interest paid 
Net interest costs before 
adjusting items 
Net interest costs before 
separately disclosed items as 
set out in the Group Income 
Statement.  
Separately disclosed items are 
those which are separately 
identified by virtue of their size 
or incidence. Excluding these 
items allows an understanding 
of the trading of the Group. 
See below 
 
A 
FREE CASH FLOW 
 
Source  
2024  
2023  
 
 
£m  
£m  
 
 
 
 
Adjusted EBITDA 
See C below 
353.0 
329.2 
Working capital and adjusting items 
Note 26 
(8.3) 
67.7 
Add back: adjusting cash items 
Note 26 
10.1 
(25.0) 
 
 
354.8 
371.9 
 
 
 
 
Tax payments 
Cash flow statement 
(5.1) 
(13.9) 
 
 
(5.1) 
(13.9) 
 
 
 
 
Interest received 
Cash flow statement 
3.4 
2.3 
Interest paid excluding interest on lease liabilities 
Note E below 
(113.4) 
(104.4) 
 
 
(110.0) 
(102.1) 
 
 
 
 
Core capex 
Note D below 
(172.7) 
(194.8) 
Repayment of lease liabilities 
Note 20 
(53.7) 
(51.5) 
Net repayment of trade loans 
Cash flow statement 
(0.7) 
- 
Free cash flow 
 
12.6 
9.6 
 
B 
 EBITDA 
 
Source  
2024  
2023  
 
 
£m  
£m 
 
 
 
 
Operating profit 
Group Income statement 
(16.4) 
167.2 
Add back: depreciation 
Add back: amortisation 
Note 4 
Note 4 
153.5 
1.5 
141.5 
1.6 
 
 
138.6 
310.3 
 
 
 
 

106 
 
C 
ADJUSTED EBITDA 
 
Source  
2024  
2023  
 
 
£m  
£m 
 
 
 
 
EBITDA 
See B above 
138.6 
310.3 
Add back: adjusting items 
Note 5 
214.4 
18.9 
 
 
353.0 
329.2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
D 
CAPITAL INVESTMENT 
 
 
Source 
2024  
2023  
 
 
£m 
£m 
 
 
 
 
Core capex 
Non-GAAP 
172.7 
194.8 
Brand swap and new site investment 
Non-GAAP 
26.6 
20.5 
Purchase of property, plant and equipment 
Cash flow statement 
199.3 
215.3 
 
E 
NET INTEREST PAID  
 
Source 
2024  
2023  
 
 
£m 
£m 
 
 
 
 
Interest received 
Cash flow statement  
3.4 
2.3 
 
 
 
 
Interest paid 
Cash flow statement  
(136.2) 
(126.0) 
Less: interest paid on lease liabilities 
Note 20 
22.8 
21.6 
Interest paid excluding lease liabilities 
 
(113.4) 
(104.4) 
 
 
 
 
Net interest paid  
 
(110.0) 
(102.1) 
 
F 
ADJUSTED CASH GENERATED FROM OPERATIONS 
 
Source  
2024  
2023  
 
 
£m  
£m 
 
 
 
 
Cash generated from operations   
Cash flow statement  
344.7 
396.9 
Add: adjusting cash items  
Note 26  
10.1 
(25.0) 
Less: net interest  
See E above  
(110.0) 
(102.1) 
Less: tax paid 
Cash flow statement  
(5.1) 
(13.9) 
Adjusted cash generated from operations  
 
239.7 
255.9